JP6800196B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). The state of the machine. Therefore, specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) is changed to give a predetermined game value to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine becomes advantageous for the player who is likely to win a prize, or becomes advantageous for the player. It is to generate rights and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If it is done, a "big hit" will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening opens a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) is won in the large winning opening, the large winning opening is closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. In addition, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, a symbol other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left middle right symbols) continues for a predetermined time and stops and shakes in a state that matches a specific display result. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, enlargement / reduction or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a game machine, there is one that can be controlled to a special state different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a special state that is more frequently controlled to the special state than the non-special state. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that the small hit game state is also set to an open mode so that the player can obtain a ball, although it is less than the big hit game state. In addition, it is described that the control is performed so that small hits are more likely to occur than in the normal state.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-156952 (paragraphs 0035, 0039)

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in the effect regarding the period controlled in the special state.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that improves the effect of a period controlled by a special state and improves the interest in the game.

(Means 1) The game machine according to the present invention is a game machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and can store information related to the variable display as a hold memory. Hold storage means (for example, first hold storage buffer, second hold storage buffer) and special state control means (for example, for game control) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. The portion of the microcomputer 100 that executes steps S126 to S128) and the special state (for example, high probability) that is more frequently controlled to the special state than the non-special state (for example, low probability / low base state (normal state)). / A special state control means that can be controlled to a low base state (second KT state) (for example, a part that executes steps 076IWS2205 and S2206 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a special state to be controlled in the special state. Pre-suggestion effect suggesting in advance that there is a hold memory corresponding to (for example, small hit pre-suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 9-55 (F), 9-56 (F) and 9-57 (F)). (For example, a portion in which the process table corresponding to the small hit prior suggestion effect is selected in step 076IWS930 in the effect control CPU 120 and steps 076IWS9232 and S8105 are executed. A part in which step 076IWS8116 is executed. ) And the number of times suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 9-55 (G), 9-56 (G) and 9-) suggesting the number of times controlled to a special state based on the execution of the pre-suggestion effect. The pre-suggestion effect execution means includes a number of times suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 076IWS8125) in which the small hit number suggestion effect shown in 57 (G) can be executed. The advance suggestion effect (for example, small hit advance suggestion effects A to C) can be executed depending on the execution mode, and the number suggestion effect execution means has at least the first number of times (for example, a special state) as the execution pattern of the number suggestion effect. The first pattern (for example, displaying characters such as "small hit + 2 times!" And "small hit + 3 times!") That suggests that it is controlled (2 times or 3 times) and the special state from the 1st time It is possible to execute the number-of-times suggestion effect with the second pattern (for example, displaying a character display such as "small hit + 4 times!") That suggests that the second number of times (for example, 4 times) is often controlled. Depending on the execution mode of the suggestion effect Therefore, the ratio of which execution pattern is used to execute the number-of-times suggestion effect is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-43, if the small hit advance suggestion effect A is executed, the ratio of the number of small hits is high. If the small hit advance suggestion effect B is executed, the ratio of 3 small hits is high, and if the small hit advance suggestion effect C is executed, the ratio of 4 small hits is high). According to such a configuration, since the effect pattern in the special state can be diversified, it is possible to improve the effect regarding the period controlled by the special state and improve the interest in the game.

(Means 2) In the means 1, a specific display means (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, gauge display 076IW021) corresponding to the number of times controlled in the special state suggested in the number-of-times suggestion effect. It may be configured to include a portion that executes 076IWS8126). According to such a configuration, since the effect pattern in the special state can be diversified, it is possible to improve the effect regarding the period controlled by the special state and improve the interest in the game.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or the means 2, a specific display means (for example, for effect control) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, gauge display 076IW021) corresponding to the number of times controlled by the special state suggested in the number-of-times suggestion effect. A portion of the CPU 120 that executes step 076IWS8126) is provided, and when the specific display means is controlled to a special state, the specific display is changed in response to the control to the special state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is (Step 076IWS9724 is executed), the number-of-times suggestion effect executing means is higher when the number of times controlled by the special state suggested by the specific display is small than when the number of times controlled by the special state suggested by the specific display is large. Since the number of small hits suggestion effect can be executed at a rate (for example, when the number of small hits notified on the gauge display 076IW021 becomes 0, the number of small hits suggestion effect is executed. ) The smaller the number of small hits, the higher the frequency of executing the small hit number suggestion effect). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the notification according to the situation.

(Means 4) A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, the battle effect shown in FIGS. 9-58 (F) and 9-58) as a prior suggestion effect in any one of the means 1 to the means 3. (For example, a part in which the process table corresponding to the battle effect is selected in step 076IWS930 in the effect control CPU 120 and steps 076IWS9232 and S8105 are executed), and the specific effect execution means is in an advantageous state as the effect result of the specific effect. Whether it is controlled or not or the number of times suggestion effect can be executed (for example, when the battle effect (win) is executed by the big hit fluctuation, it is notified that the probability change big hit is performed, and the battle effect (win) by the small hit fluctuation. ) Is executed, the small hit number suggestion effect is executed). According to such a configuration, since the effect pattern in the special state can be diversified, it is possible to improve the effect regarding the period controlled by the special state and improve the interest in the game.

(Means 5) A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, the battle effect shown in FIGS. 9-58 (F) and 9-58) as a prior suggestion effect in any one of the means 1 to the means 3. (For example, a part in which the process table corresponding to the battle effect is selected in step 076IWS930 in the effect control CPU 120 and steps 076IWS9232 and S8105 are executed), and the specific effect execution means is in an advantageous state as the effect result of the specific effect. Whether or not it is controlled and the number of times suggestion effect can be executed (for example, both the notification of whether or not a probabilistic big hit is achieved in one battle effect and the number of small hits suggestion effect are configured to be executable). It may be configured. According to such a configuration, since the effect pattern in the special state can be diversified, it is possible to improve the effect regarding the period controlled by the special state and improve the interest in the game.

(Means 6) In any of the means 1 to the means 5, an advantageous state suggestion effect (for example, a button notice effect) that suggests the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state in a non-special state can be executed. An effect execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps 076IWS8115 to S8120 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided, and the advantageous state suggestion effect execution means includes at least the first element (for example, an operation promotion display of a blue display color). An advantageous state suggestion effect (for example, a button notice effect A) depending on the aspect and the execution mode including the second element (for example, the operation promotion display of the red display color) that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first element. , B) can be executed (see FIG. 9-40), and the pre-suggestion effect execution means has a pre-suggestion effect (for example, small hit advance) depending on the execution mode including at least the first element and the execution mode including the second element. When the suggestion effects B and C) can be executed (see FIGS. 9-43) and the pre-suggestion effect is executed by the execution mode including the second element, the pre-suggestion effect is executed by the execution mode including the first element. In the number-of-times suggestion effect, a higher number of times is suggested as the number of times the special state is controlled (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-43, if the small hit advance suggestion effect B is executed. The ratio of the number of small hits of 3 is high, and if the small hit advance suggestion effect C is executed, the ratio of the number of small hits of 4 is high). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being betrayed and to improve the interest in the game.

(Means 7) In any one of means 1 to 6, a special effect capable of executing a special effect (for example, a roulette effect shown in FIGS. 9-71) including an effect mode common to the non-special state and the special state. An effect result (for example, FIG. 9-71 (B1)) showing that the special effect execution means may be controlled to an advantageous state in a non-special state by providing an execution means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control). It is possible to execute a special effect including the character display 076IW031) such as "super heat", and in a special state, it is possible to execute the special effect as a pre-suggestion effect, and the number of times suggestion effect is the effect result (for example, FIG. ) Shall be configured to be able to execute a special effect including the character display 076IW032) such as "small 4" (see FIG. 9-71). According to such a configuration, the data capacity can be reduced by standardizing the materials for the production.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in the KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the character control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how of transition of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect processing at the time of over winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the suggestion effect decision table at the time of over winning. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect processing at the time of a small hit prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of a small hit prize. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number emphasizing effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the prize ball number emphasis effect decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for a variable display start. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the button notice effect decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the battle production setting process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit notice effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the small hit advance suggestion effect decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating display mode of right-handed notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit advance suggestion effect, the small hit number suggestion effect, and the battle effect executed in a high probability / low base state (second KT state). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit advance suggestion effect, the small hit number suggestion effect, and the battle effect executed in a high probability / low base state (second KT state). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit advance suggestion effect, the small hit number suggestion effect, and the battle effect executed in a high probability / low base state (second KT state). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit advance suggestion effect, the small hit number suggestion effect, and the battle effect executed in a high probability / low base state (second KT state). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit advance suggestion effect, the small hit number suggestion effect, and the battle effect executed in a high probability / low base state (second KT state). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit advance suggestion effect, the small hit number suggestion effect, and the battle effect executed in a high probability / low base state (second KT state). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 1. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 2. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 4. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode of the roulette effect in the modification 5. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification mode of the number of small hits in the modification 6.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation of aiming at the right side of the game area and performing a firing operation is provided. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, LEDs, and is lit and controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held is provided. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. The right-handed notification LED 37 is lit and controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening, so that the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area does not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Has been done. In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering, the game ball is launched (so-called left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation) is performed.

In this example, since the row of nails 19 is provided, the game ball can be won in the first start winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed. Not limited to. For example, since the first start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be won. A game ball may be configured to be able to win a prize in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the mouth on the left side of the game area and also providing the row of nails 19.

A passing gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction to move the bottom surface. The large winning opening located below the member is changed into an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which the game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot win a prize. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in the jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the rear, and the opening control is executed so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning opening for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning opening are provided. FIG. 1 As shown in, a special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of a flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction. By moving forward and backward, the game ball can be won in the special winning opening and the second starting winning opening located below the bottom member (also called the open state) and the game ball cannot be won in the closed state (closed state). Change to). The special variable winning ball device 17 has a bottom member in a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state of being moved forward toward the front, and the opening control is executed to open the special winning opening which is the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. The opening control that opens the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed so as to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed so as to be slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are formed. The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed on the variable winning ball device 6B without winning a prize. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a restricting piece, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back component, and the time required for the flow is delayed as compared with the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are arranged. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is used as the special variable winning ball device. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the large winning opening is provided in the large winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is open-controlled and the large winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the large winning opening is closed, the game ball cannot be passed (entered) through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) through other prize openings such as the first start winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is open-controlled and the special winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and controlled and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

Further, in the second start winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) Is provided on the right side of the game area, so when the player is in a big hit game or in a KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the game area and launches (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating region because the game shifts to the jackpot game state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves as both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and further, frame LEDs 9 for game effects are provided around the game area. ..

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. When the player performs a left-handed operation by rotating the ball striking handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol is displayed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) as a confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "big hit". .. Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be configured to be a "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state is a combination of the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, prepare multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening, and gaming states (normal state, probability change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state. , The jackpot type is set according to these. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a probability variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the jackpot type.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), the probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

In the KT state, KT control is executed, which is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hit game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than that in the big hit game state, but it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shorter than the normal state is executed (time saving state), and it is called "normal figure hit" in the normal figure game. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming the game ball from the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

The probabilistic state, KT state, and high base state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. To do. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a probability variation state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko game machine 1 controls the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (when a predetermined return process is not executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in a state of being reset.

When the jackpot game is completed and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-handed strike operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a point of the frame LED9. Equal / extinguishing, operation of the movable body 32, etc. may be performed.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern is in the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) Detect signals (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a signal for turning on the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or a prize-winning door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal that specifies the sound to be output) in order to output the sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. It is supplied to the board 13 or an LED signal (a signal for designating an LED lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the LED control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and is in a manner specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on / off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the LED.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, LED lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, LED signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). When the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the first special symbol game are realized (details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). When the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the second special symbol game are realized. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process for each timer interrupt, it is possible to control the big hit game state, the small hit game state, the game state, and the like (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

Further, although the description is omitted in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is a process for outputting a test signal so that the control state of the game machine can be confirmed outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 also controls to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can identify the period during which the right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 controls to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not control to output a right-handed test signal during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the first start winning prize determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning in the first starting winning opening, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening, a random value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information. Will be done. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination results such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the first hold memory number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is controlled by the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110A to S113A) of the first special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process in step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information and the like. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" is set based on the random value for determining the display result. The jackpot type of the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal processing ends.

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “1”. In this first variation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of variation patterns are set using random values for determining the variation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". It includes processing to decide which one to use. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. In this first special symbol variation process, the process of setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol are measured. Processing to be done is included. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation processing ends. To do.

In this example, since the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) is performed. When the variable display of the special symbol is being displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol may result in a small hit and be controlled by the small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing. As a result, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process unless the small hit game is in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decorative pattern, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small hit ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small hit control, and no particular effect is performed. Therefore, the small hit ending period is shorter than in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control, and the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be longer than in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, regarding the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pretreatment period, the length of the period may be different depending on the game state, as in the above-mentioned small hit ending period.

The first special symbol stop process in step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. In this first special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The process of making settings is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the setting process for starting the big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", a process for starting the small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be explained. In addition, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the transition to the second special symbol variation process is performed to change the second special symbol. When the display is in progress, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the game may be controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation processing. As a result, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process unless the small hit game is in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted (timer It may be configured to suspend the update).

Regarding the small hit control based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be different depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process process, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S120 to S128) of the accessory control process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The bonus control normal process in step S120 is executed when the value of the bonus control process flag is “0”. In this bonus control normal process, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is made, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is made, the process for starting the big hit game is performed. , The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “1”. In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passing gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is “2”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “3”. This big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. , End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “4”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit execution number, the accessory control process The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the processing after opening the jackpot ends.

The jackpot end processing in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “5”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control, KT control, and high-base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “6”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the special winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “7”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the special winning opening is opened and the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “8”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decorative light emitting body such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Controls such as operation to operate various production devices are performed. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the LED control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of the prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 076IW)
Next, the feature unit 076IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 076IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 076IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this feature unit 076IW, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state, as will be described later, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and the small hit Even if the above occurs, there are very few cases where the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and a high base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B becomes long. Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this feature unit 076IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. When the first special symbol fluctuates, the proportion determined as a small hit is low, whereas when the second special symbol fluctuates, the proportion determined as a small hit is high (however, it will be described later). (Except for the case of forced loss), the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

The configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is set to the normal state. It may be in a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Further, the feature unit 076IW is configured such that the time required from the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. Although the details will be described later, the feature unit 076IW has a configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, and the game ball passes in the first KT state described later. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41. Since it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the time required for the game to be played, when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state when one game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the first KT state, the one The game ball can be directly entered into the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
9-1 and 9-2 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 9-1 shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 9-2 shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, it is configured so that it can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to check the current setting value or change the setting value by executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

First, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 9-1. In the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "247/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the case of the set value "6" has the highest jackpot probability "2470/65536". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and 9-1 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability changing state (low probability). The small hit probability is constant as "6298/65536" regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability variation state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and 9-1 (B), even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. By making the set values "1" to "6" different, the number of determined values for each set value may be matched.

Next, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 9-2. In the example shown in FIG. 9-2 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "247/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-2 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the case of the set value "6" has the highest jackpot probability "2470/65536". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

Further, in this example, unlike the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-2, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is not determined as a big hit. In all cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Therefore, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, in principle, it can only be determined as a big hit or a small hit, and there is no case of a miss. However, in this example, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it may be determined in rare cases that the compulsory loss will be described later.

Even when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it may be configured so that it may be determined as a deviation at a low rate.

In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-1, the judgment values corresponding to the deviations are the judgments corresponding to all the set values "1" to "6". It is included in the value (as shown in FIG. 9-1, there is no set value at which the probability of loss is 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the loss differs depending on the set value (as shown in FIG. 9-1, the loss probability differs depending on which of the set values "1" to "6". ing).

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, for example, when the probability of loss is 0 (that is, the set value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the loss). It may be configured to have. For example, at the set value "6" having the highest advantage (highest jackpot probability), the loss probability may be 0, and the determination value corresponding to the loss may not be included.

Further, not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, there may be a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, a judgment value that does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 9-1), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0 so that the judgment value for the small hit is not included. Good.

In addition, in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and 9-1 (B), when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit probability is determined between the probabilistic state (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state). Although the matching and losing probabilities are different, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the jackpot probability is higher than in the non-probability state (low probability state), so the small hit probability is higher than in the non-probability state (low probability state). May be reduced to match the probability of loss. Further, even if the set values are different in, for example, "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched respectively. As a result, in a game machine in which the number of stages that can be substantially set is less than 6 or a game machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a type of game machine having a setting change function in 6 stages and a hardware / software configuration. Can be standardized and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
9-3 (A) and 9-3 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to "2R normal jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot" based on the random number for hit type determination. It is a table referred to for determining either "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", or "10R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), in this feature unit 076IW, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", There is a 9% chance that it will be a "10R probability variation jackpot", a 56% chance that it will be a "6R probability variation jackpot", and a 35% chance that it will be a "6R normal jackpot". Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), in this feature unit 076IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be a "10R probability variation jackpot" with a 10% probability, a "6R probability variation jackpot" with a 50% probability, a "2R probability variation jackpot" with a 5% probability, and a "2R probability variation jackpot" with a 35% probability. 2R normal jackpot "is determined.

The "10R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this feature unit 076IW, when "10R probability variation jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", and "6R normal jackpot" are obtained, a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses in each round of the jackpot game. The large winning openings are controlled to be open until a fixed number of game balls (10 in this example) are won, and a maximum of 10 large winning openings can be won in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variation big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of winnings to the large winning openings that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

Further, in this feature unit 076IW, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to either the first KT state, the second KT state, or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. The method of transitioning the gaming state after the jackpot game will be described later (see FIG. 9-22).

Further, in this example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (per ordinary symbol), and based on the determination result, the normal symbol is displayed. The control to execute the variable display is performed, but in this example, 99/100 is uniformly performed regardless of whether or not it is in the probabilistic state, whether or not it is in the KT state, or whether or not it is in the high base state. It is decided to hit the normal symbol with the probability of. Further, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a high base flag indicating that the high base state is set is set, and if the high base flag is set (if the high base state is set), the variable winning ball device 6B Is controlled to open for a long period of 5.5 seconds, and if the high base flag is not set (if it is in a low base state), the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a short period of 0.2 seconds. Control.

(Variation pattern table)
9-4 to 9-6 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in the feature portion 076IW. The EXT shown in FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special symbol and decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and decorative symbol. 21 types of # 01 to # 21 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 09 or 01 to 21) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 9-4 (A). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if it is in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), it is shown in FIG. 9-4 (B). The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, when it is in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 9-5 (C) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 02. Specifically, when it is determined to be a small hit, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this feature unit 076IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, a situation occurs in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening. I will end up. Therefore, in this feature unit 076IW, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (C), even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is made extremely long and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is executed. By lowering the number of small hits, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball even in a non-KT state. In the feature unit 076IW, the "small hit occurrence frequency" is, for example, the occurrence rate of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. The rate of occurrence of is higher than the normal state.

In this feature section 076IW, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time even if it is a big hit. By making the time relatively long, 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning a prize in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 9-5 (D) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 03 to # 04 Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (D), when the small hit is determined as the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the small hit has a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds. 2 Fluctuation pattern # 03 (variation pattern for preparation for opening the second starting winning opening) is determined. In this feature unit 076IW, as described above, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 17 is controlled in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this feature unit 076IW, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 can be used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. Further, when the big hit is determined as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 04 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is executed, FIG. 9-5 (Fig. 9-5) The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 2nd to 49th fluctuations shown in E) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 to # 08 It is decided to be either. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (E), when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation is determined. It may be determined by # 05 or the second fluctuation pattern # 06 of the shortened fluctuation whose fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 07 with reach may be determined. The second variation pattern # 05 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 06 can be selected only when one or more second hold memories are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 08 with reach is determined.

In addition, the 50th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 9-5 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 09 to # 10 Will be decided.

In the feature unit 076IW, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “during chance time”. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (F), when a small hit is determined as the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state, a character display such as "chance time ends !!" is displayed on the image display device 5. The second variation pattern # 09 with the end display is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (F), when a big hit is determined as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, a character display such as "chance time ends !!" is displayed on the image display device 5. A second variation pattern # 10 with a predetermined revival display is determined after the end display to be performed.

In addition, in this feature part 076IW, as shown in FIG. 9-4, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 09 with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is displayed. It is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set to a long fluctuation time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the big hit change of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player makes a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from this. Therefore, in this feature unit 076IW, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, it is possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike the present feature unit 076IW, even if the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first). If the game machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped), the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is completed. Select the variation pattern table according to the number of times. In this case, if the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation is executed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 9-6 (G) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 11 to # 13. Will be decided.

As in the case of the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), when the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is determined to be a small hit, the second variation is made. It may be determined as a variation pattern (second variation pattern # 11) for preparing to open the starting winning opening. On the other hand, when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), when the jackpot is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

Further, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is completed, the high shown in FIG. 9-6 (H). Probability / The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the first KT and the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, any of the second fluctuation patterns # 14 to # 17 Is decided.

As in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (H), when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / 1st KT state. , The second fluctuation pattern # 14 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern # 15 of the shortened fluctuation with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 16 with reach may be determined. The second variation pattern # 14 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 15 can be selected only when one or more second hold memories are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 17 with reach is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 9-6 (I) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 18 to # 21. ..

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (I), when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 18 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 19 of the normal fluctuation of 5 seconds. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the variation time may be as long as 2 minutes and the second variation pattern # 20 accompanied by the battle effect may be determined. Further, when the big hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation time is as long as 2 minutes and the second fluctuation pattern # 21 accompanied by the battle effect is determined.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Further, FIG. 9-7 (1) shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, and FIG. 9-7 (2) shows the variable winning ball device in the second KT state. The opening pattern of 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 is shown.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 9-7 (1). As shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 executes the variable display of the normal symbol. If it is determined to be a normal symbol hit, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and if it is determined to be off, the off symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. In this feature unit 076IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. ing. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process is 0.1 seconds. After that, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball wins in the special winning opening. It will be in a possible state. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the variable winning ball device on the upstream side is The opening time of 6B is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened in the next normal symbol. After a lapse of at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 0.1 seconds before opening the second start winning opening. Therefore, in the feature unit 076IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Further, in the feature unit 076IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol variation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-opening processing time of 0.1 seconds, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B is shorter than the time when the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is already open. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B when the state is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 9-7 (2). As shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 executes the variable display of the normal symbol. When it is determined to be a normal symbol hit, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be off, the off symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. In this feature unit 076IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 second. ing. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening processing is 2.6 seconds. After that, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball wins in the special winning opening. It will be possible.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in the feature unit 076IW, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 second + symbol confirmation time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, so that it is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and it is easy for the game ball to win the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, a game ball is easily won in the special winning opening and a prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, in this example, it is also called "small hit RUSH", and in the second KT state, "small hit RUSH". Character display such as "is displayed.

Further, in the feature unit 076IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After the lapse of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 2.6 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Since it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled by. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

In the feature unit 076IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103). This is done by executing (see step S26). Further, in the normal symbol process processing of step S26, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), and whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state. Regardless of whether or not there is a big hit game state, it is determined whether or not to make a normal figure hit with the same probability (for example, 99/100).

In this feature unit 076IW, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same for each of 0.2 seconds in the first KT state and the second KT state, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is changed by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after the variable winning ball device 6B is closed can be controlled, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closed period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different depending on the setting. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is configured to have a shorter closing period (interval period) by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state. ..

As will be described later, the feature unit 076IW is shown in FIG. 9-7 (1) by controlling the high base state by setting a high base flag indicating that the first KT state is a high base state. As described above, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled so that the opening time is long. Further, in the second KT state, by controlling to the low base state without setting the high base flag, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be short. ing.

For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1). The variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a long time. If it is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) and the special flag is not set, the variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 9-7 (2) is opened for a short time. It may be configured to control with a two-open pattern (short open). That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, out of the 50 times shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 49th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 6B being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

In addition, as described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability / non-KT state.

In this feature unit 076IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in the state where the normal symbol has stopped changing and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 6B is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate By the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, the variable winning ball device 6B does not open, and the special winning opening can be won). On the other hand, in this feature unit 076IW, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Is set to start, so that it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Direction control command)
9-8 and 9-9 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 9-8, the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8025 (H) are decorations that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of a symbol. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8025 (H), the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Control.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 10R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this feature unit 076IW, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a display result specification command immediately before the variation pattern command, so that the display result specification command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is Since it can be determined that the display result specification command is for the first special symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command is a display result specification command for the second special symbol, the display result is displayed. The designation command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result designation command, but corresponds to each of 10R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has finished lighting. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has started lighting.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. The command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved storage number may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation commands) indicating the contents of the winning determination result at the time of starting winning. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol designation command) that indicates whether or not a big hit, whether or not a small hit is made, and the judgment result of the type of big hit among the judgment results at the time of winning. is there. Further, the command C6XX (H) is an effect control command (variation category command) indicating a determination result of which variation pattern is used among the determination results at the time of winning.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) for designating the currently set setting value. A set value is set in "XX". For example, when the set value is set to "1", the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the set value command.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 9-8 and 9-9, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. It should be noted that the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(Starting prize judgment process)
FIG. 9-10 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process. Of these, FIG. 9-10 (A) shows a flowchart of the first start winning determination process (step S101A) executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). Further, FIG. 9-10 (B) shows a flowchart of the second start winning determination process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B).

First, the first start winning determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 9-10 (A). In the first start winning determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 076IWS1211A). If the first start port switch 22A is not in the ON state, the process ends as it is. When the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first hold storage for counting the first hold storage number). (Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (step 076IWS1212A). If the number of first reserved storage reaches the upper limit, the process ends as it is.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increments the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step 076IWS1213A). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from counters for generating each random number such as a hit determination random number, a hit type determination random number, and a fluctuation pattern determination random number, and stores them in a storage area in the first hold storage buffer. (Step 076IWS1214A). A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of first reserved storages (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved storage buffer and is formed in the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning determination process of preliminarily determining a variation display result or variation pattern when a variation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed (step 076IWS1215A). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step 076IWS1216A), and also controls to transmit the variable category command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS1216A). Step 076IWS1217A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first effective start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS1218A).

Next, the second start winning determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 9-10 (B). In the second start winning determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 076IWS1211B). If the second start port switch 22B is not in the ON state, the process ends as it is. When the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold storage for counting the second hold storage number). (Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (step 076IWS1212B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process ends as it is.

If the second hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increments the value of the second hold storage number counter by 1 (step 076IWS1213B). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from counters for generating each random number such as a hit determination random number, a hit type determination random number, and a fluctuation pattern determination random number, and stores them in a storage area in the second hold storage buffer. (Step 076IWS1214B). In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured and formed in the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning determination process (step 076IWS1215B). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step 076IWS1216B), and also controls to transmit the variable category command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS1216B). Step 076IWS1217B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first effective start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS1218B).

(1st special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 9-11 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A is a state in which the first special symbol display device 4A does not display the variation of the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 076IWS50A). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 076IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed. If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, and reads the random number value of the RAM 102. While storing in the first random number buffer area (step 076IWS53A), the value of the first reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 076IWS54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the first hold storage number = n-1. Store in the storage area corresponding to. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiable and saved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 076IWS55A). In this example, by executing the process of step 076IWS55A, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, the setting value command is configured to be transmitted at each end of the fluctuation display, or the setting value command is transmitted during the fluctuation display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. The probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, it is determined that the state is low probability / first KT, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is executed. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, the command is high probability / first KT state. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability / second KT state is determined and the high accuracy / second KT background specification command is executed. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step 076IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 076IWS69A without performing the processing after step 076IWS58A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, it is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the wire is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 076IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and by shifting to step 076IWS59A, at the time of starting winning. Regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 076IWS57A, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 076IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 076IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 076IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 076IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 076IWS61A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 076IWS62A), the jackpot type is stored (step 076IWS63A), and step 076IWS69A. Move to.

If the big hit is not made in step 076IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 076IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 076IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 076IWS65A). Step 076IWS66A). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step 076IWS69A), and if it is "0", step 076IWS75A. Move to. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 076IWS70A). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step 076IWS71A). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 076IWS75A. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 076IWS72A), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 076IWS73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 076IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS75A.

In this feature unit 076IW, as will be described later, it is highly probable that the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state is managed at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / High base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled and 50 times of fluctuation display is executed. In the case of the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), when the 50th variation display is started, it is determined as Y in steps 076IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 076IWS72A and S72B. At the same time as being reset, the special figure time reduction flag is also reset in steps 076IWS73A and S73B, and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed notification and continuing the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as the game state, the fluctuation reduction common to the first KT state is shortened. It is a flag for making the production background common to the first KT state while keeping the state.

In this example, by executing the process of step 076IWS74A or the process of step 076IWS74B described later, the high base state is caused by the start of fluctuation of either the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol. When the final fluctuation of (in this example, the 50th fluctuation display) is started, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set and the fluctuation shortening state is extended. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, whether the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol (in this example, the 50th variation display) ends. , Or the other special symbol variation display (in this example, the 51st variation display) is reset, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset, and the extension of the variation shortening state is completed. Is desirable.

Then, in step 076IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 076IWS75A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 076IWS75A is confirmed.

In step 076IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

(1st fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 9-12 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, first, whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is set with the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened. (Step 076IWS1700A). In this example, it is more advantageous to execute the variation display of the second special symbol by setting the special symbol time reduction flag and performing the shortening control of the variation display of the special symbol (Fig. 9-4). (Refer to FIG. 9-6), since a small hit is likely to occur, the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-4 (A) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected (step 076IWS1701A). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the KT shown in FIG. 9-4 (B) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected (step 076IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 076IWS1701A and S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 9-4 is used (step 076IWS1703A). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS1704A).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 076IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and the fluctuation time. (Step 076IWS1705A), and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 076IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 076IWS1707A).

(1st special symbol change processing)
FIG. 9-13 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 076IWS1120A). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the jackpot type. Based on the determination result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) is sent to the effect control CPU 120. Control for transmission is performed (step 076IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step 076IWS1122A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step 076IWS1123A), controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS1123A). Step 076IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 076IWS1130A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 076IWS1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 076IWS1126A). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is obtained is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the process ends as it is.

In this example, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in principle, it is only determined that it is a big hit or a small hit, so it is extremely rare that it is determined as N in step 076IWS1126A. Only when it becomes. Therefore, if the determination process of step 076IWS1126A is omitted and N is determined in step 076IWS1125A, the process may be configured to proceed to step 076IWS1127A as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 076IWS1127A). .. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 076IWS1128A). Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 076IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot, the process ends as it is.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 076IWS1125A) or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 076IWS1126A), either the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot is displayed. When the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed (Y in step 076IWS1127A, N in step 076IWS1128A), the CPU 103 sends the first compulsory symbol to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send a confirmation designation command (step 076IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 076IWS1130A).

By executing the processes of steps 076IWS1125A to S1129A, in this feature unit 076IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is stopped. And the second special symbol do not cause a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol is changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 076IWS1129A. As a display result, control is performed so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

In this example, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot). If the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 076IWS1128A), but in this case, the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed. Based on the small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 076IWS1120A, the processing of steps 076IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first fluctuation time timer in step 076IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the first variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. If there is, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 076IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the first variation is performed during the small hit game. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed and the small hit game is completed, the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 9-14 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 076IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 076IWS2011A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 076IWS2012A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who performs the right-handed operation. Is advantageous for the player, and the right-handed display 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is lit during the low probability / first KT state, but the 50th variation display is displayed by executing the processes of steps 076IWS69A to S74A and S69B to S74B. When starting, the low probability / first KT state is terminated to shift to the normal state (non-KT state), and the processes of steps 076IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B are executed to end the 50th variation display. The right-handed display 26 is turned off.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 076IWS2014A). In this case, if the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 076IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation processing, it is forced as a stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 076IWS2015A). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag indicating that the jackpot is started (step 076IWS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 076IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 076IWS2018A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS2027A.

By executing the processes of steps 076IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. Therefore, right-handed at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. The display 26 may be configured to start lighting.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 076IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 076IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 076IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 076IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS2027A.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 076IWS2027A).

In this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, the right-handed notification that urges the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, a launch promotion notification that urges the player to launch the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 can be executed as a right-handed notification. You may be.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right-handed notification or launch promotion notification is not executed, and when the game ball wins the first start winning opening in that state, the right-handed notification or launch promotion notification is executed. (In this case, since the gate is waiting to pass through, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning opening, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started immediately, and the first holding memory is set). It may be configured as.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, low volume sound output or small screen display). Therefore, the player may be configured to perform a left-handed notification prompting the player to launch and operate the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, loud sound output or It may be configured to perform left-handed notification by (large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, according to the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. , The player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation may be configured to perform the left-handed notification in a manner in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the game machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of detected game balls at the passing gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. In addition, when the passing gate 41 detects a game ball a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening and the special winning opening are more than a predetermined number. It may be configured to give a left-handed notification when a small number (for example, one) or more of game balls are detected.

In this feature unit 076IW, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening or the special winning opening is displayed. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be given.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 9-15 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing in the second special symbol process processing. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 076IWS50B). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 076IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed. If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, and reads the random number value of the RAM 102. While storing in the second random number buffer area (step 076IWS53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 076IWS54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second hold storage buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second hold storage number = n-1. Store in the storage area corresponding to. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 076IWS55B). In this example, by executing the process of step 076IWS55B, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 076IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step 076IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. When it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 076IWS69B without performing the processing after step 076IWS58B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the wire is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 076IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process shifts to step 076IWS59B. It may be forcibly removed regardless of whether a random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 076IWS57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 076IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 076IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 076IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 076IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 076IWS61B). .. Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot (step 076IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 076IWS63B). ), The process proceeds to step 076IWS69B.

If the big hit is not made in step 076IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 076IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 076IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 076IWS65B). Step 076IWS66B). In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-2, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is not determined to be a big hit, the judgment value is assigned so that all the hits are small hits. Therefore, if the processing of steps 076IWS64B and S65B is omitted and it is determined to be N in step 076IWS60B, the process may proceed directly to step 076IWS66B and the second small hit flag may be set. Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 076IWS69B), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step 076IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 076IWS70B). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step 076IWS71B). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 076IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 076IWS72B), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 076IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 076IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS75B.

Then, in step 076IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 076IWS75B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 076IWS75B is confirmed.

In step 076IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 9-12. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9-12, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 076IWS1700A, and confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. Unless the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-5 (C) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. Select the second special symbol variation pattern table for KT. If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 fluctuates according to whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set and the number of fluctuations. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, any one of the variation pattern tables for KT shown in FIGS. 9-5 (D) to 9-6 (I) is selected for the second special symbol variation pattern table. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-5 (D). Select, and if it is the 2nd to 49th variation, select the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-5 (E), and if it is the 50th variation, select the second variation shown in FIG. 9-5 (F). Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-6 (G). The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-6 (H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability / second KT state), the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-6 (I) is selected.

(2nd special symbol change processing)
FIG. 9-16 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 076IWS1120B). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the jackpot type. Based on the decision result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command, display result 6 designation command, display result 7 designation command) Is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second fluctuation time timer (step 076IWS1122B), and when the second fluctuation time timer times out (step 076IWS1123B), controls to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS1123B). Step 076IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 076IWS1130B).

When the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 076IWS1125B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 076IWS1126B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 076IWS1127B). .. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R probability variable jackpot (step 076IWS1128B). .. Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 076IWS63B. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the process ends as it is.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 076IWS1125B), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 076IWS1126B), the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, and When the variation display of the second special symbol that is neither a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot) is being executed (Y in step 076IWS1127B, N in step 076IWS1128B), the CPU 103 is the effect control CPU 120. The second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is controlled to be transmitted to (step 076IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 076IWS1130B).

By executing the processes of steps 076IWS1125B to S1129B, in this feature unit 076IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the second special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is stopped. And the second special symbol do not cause a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the change display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol is changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 076IWS1129B. As a display result, control is performed so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, Or, if the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes the 2R probability variation jackpot) is being executed, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 076IWS1128B), but in this case, the first special symbol. Based on the fact that the variation display of the symbol becomes a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 076IWS1120B, the processing of steps 076IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second variable time timer of step 076IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the second variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. If there is, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 076IWS1127B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the second variation is performed during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is completed, the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

By configuring as described above, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the reduced working hours state), the remaining second hold memory can be digested, and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

Further, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol is provided on the right side of the game area. In a game machine configured to be provided with a starting winning opening (not a variable winning ball device) and to shift to a normal state via a time saving state of the first special symbol after the end of the second KT state (small hit RUSH). , As described above, the configuration in which the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied. In this case, as the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of small hits based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol also increases, but the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed accordingly. By increasing the frequency of this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the second hold memory in the normal state, and further suppress the occurrence of the jackpot at the unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be done.

(2nd special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 076IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 076IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 076IWS2012B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 076IWS2014B). In this case, if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 076IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation processing, it is forced as a stop symbol of the second special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 076IWS2015B). When the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag (step 076IWS2016B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second jackpot flag (step 076IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 076IWS2018B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS2027B.

By executing the processes of steps 076IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

If the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 076IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 076IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 076IWS2022B).

In this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it is determined as a big hit or a small hit in principle, so that it is extremely rarely forced to be judged as N in step 076IWS2020B. This is the case. Therefore, the process of step 076IWS2020B may be omitted, and when N is determined in step 076IWS2015B, the process may be configured to shift to step 076IWS2021B as it is.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 076IWS2023B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 076IWS2024B), and is right with respect to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send a lighting start designation command (step 076IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 076IWS2026B). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of step 076IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, so that it is better for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. It is advantageous, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

However, in this example, even if a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol, the right-handed display 26 should already be lit when the KT state is in effect. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 076IWS2023B, if a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the right-handed display 26 is started to light in duplicate. The process of sending a right-handed lighting start specification command is not performed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 076IWS2027B).

(Characteristic control normal processing)
FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart showing a bonus control normal process (step S120) in the bonus control process process. In the accessory control normal process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the jackpot start flag is set (step 076IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 076IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer before opening the big winning opening (step 076IWS2103), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step 076IWS2104), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". "(Step 076IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 076IWS2106).

(Waiting for gate passage)
FIG. 9-19 is a flowchart showing a gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 076IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, and the special time saving flag if set, and clears the value of the high base count counter to 0 ( Step 076IWS2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 076IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step 076IWS2504).

In this feature unit 076IW, the jackpot game is not started immediately when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol by executing the gate passage waiting process, but the game is played at the passing gate 41. It is configured to shift to the jackpot game on condition that the ball has passed and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 9-20 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step S125) in the accessory control process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 076IWS2200), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 076IWS2202. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 corresponds to the display time corresponding to the time when the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) on the jackpot end display timer. A value is set (step 076IWS2201), and the process ends.

In step 076IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 076IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 076IWS2203). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 076IWS2203), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step 076IWS2204). Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 076IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 076IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 076IWS2205). Further, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time reduction flag and shifts to the KT state (step 076IWS2206). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS2214. In the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the high base flag is not set, so that the control is performed in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

If it is neither a 10R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot completed this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 076IWS2207). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 076IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 076IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 076IWS2208). Further, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 076IWS2209), and further sets the special figure time reduction flag to shift to the KT state (step 076IWS2210). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS2214. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, only the high base flag is set, and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base count counter is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see step 076IWS2502 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base count counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is completed, it is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the value of the high base count counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. In step 076IWS69A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 076IWS69B of the second special symbol normal processing, it is determined as Y, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter of step 076IWS70A and step 076IWS70B is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 076IWS2211), and sets the special figure time reduction flag. To the KT state (step 076IWS2212). Further, the CPU 103 sets "50" in the high base number counter (step 076IWS2213). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS2214. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 076IWS2214).

(Small hit end processing)
FIG. 9-21 is a flowchart showing a small hit end process (step S128) in the accessory control process process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 076IWS2300), and if the small hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step 076IWS2302. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 displays on the small hit end display timer corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 076IWS2301), and the process ends.

In step 076IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 076IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 076IWS2303). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 076IWS2303), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 076IWS2304). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the right-handed display 26 is lit (step 076IWS2305). If the right-handed display 26 is lit, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 076IWS2306), and also transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 076IWS2307).

In this example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right-handed indicator 26 starts lighting at the start of the small hit game (steps 076IWS2023B to S2025B). (See), the processing of steps 076IWS2304 to S2307 is executed, so that the right-handed display 26 is turned on at the end of the small hit game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 076IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the gaming state in the feature unit 076IW will be described. FIG. 9-22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the game state transitions in the feature unit 076IW. First, in the feature unit 076IW, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, a 10R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 6R normal big hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9-22, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs in the low probability / low base state, it shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. The high probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 076IWS2204-S2206). In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and until the next jackpot occurs. A high probability / high base state is maintained (see steps 076IWS2207-S2210). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and whether the next jackpot occurs. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 076IWS2211 to S2213).

After shifting to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), in this feature 076IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. And perform the firing operation (right-handed) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot is mainly generated.

As shown in FIG. 9-22, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), a high probability / low base state occurs after the jackpot game ends. It shifts to (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 076IWS2204 to S2206). In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 076IWS2207-S2210). In addition, in this feature unit 076IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 6R probability variation jackpot is 50% in total (see FIG. 9-3), so that the probability is once high / high. In the base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 076IWS2211 to S2213).

As shown in FIG. 9-22, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), a high probability / low base state occurs after the jackpot game ends. It shifts to (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 076IWS2204 to S2206). In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 076IWS2207-S2210). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 076IWS2211 to S2213). In this feature unit 076IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIGS. 9-3 (D) and (E)). Once the low probability / high base state is reached, the low probability / high base state loops at a rate of 35%. If a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot occurs and the probability / high base state is reached, and then 50 fluctuation displays are completed without the next jackpot occurring, FIG. 9-22 shows. As shown, it shifts to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 076IWS69A to S73A, S69B to S73B).

As shown in FIG. 9-22, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), a high probability / low base state occurs after the jackpot game ends. It shifts to (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 076IWS2204 to S2206). In this feature unit 076IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is 15 when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Since it is% (see FIGS. 9-3 (D) and 9-3 (E)), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 076IWS2207-S2210). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 076IWS2211 to S2213).

In addition, in FIG. 9-22, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is described, but the variation of the second special symbol is performed at a low rate. It is also possible that the display will be performed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-22, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-22, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-22, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 9-23 to 9-27 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 076IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 076IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 076IWS613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 076IWS614), the effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 076IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 076IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 076IWS617). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 076IWS618).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 076IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 076IWS620). ).

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation command (1st symbol confirmation command, 2nd symbol confirmation command, 1st forced symbol confirmation command, 2nd forced symbol confirmation command) (step 076IWS621) ), The effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 076IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 076IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start displaying the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 076IWS624). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 076IWS625).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 076IWS626), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 076IWS627). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 076IWS628).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 076IWS624 and S627, a right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game.

In addition, for example, by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display displayed during the big hit game, the set value suggestion effect suggesting the current set value may be executed. For example, when the right-handed display is started in step 076IWS624, the right-handed display of the white display color is normally started, but when it is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect, the set value is "1". If is, the right-handed display of the blue display color is started at a relatively high rate, and if the setting value is "2", the right-handed display of the green display color is started at a relatively high rate. , When the setting value is "3", the right-handed display of the yellow display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "4", the right of the orange display color is relatively high. When the setting value is "5", the right-handed display of the red display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "6", the right-handed display is started at a relatively high rate. Right-handed display of the rainbow-colored display color may be started.

Further, for example, the right-handed display is configured to be continuously executed even during the KT state after the big hit game ends, and the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display is changed and set at the timing of the end of the big hit game. It may be configured to perform a value suggestion effect.

Further, for example, when the fluctuation display of 50 times is finished in the low probability / first KT state and the state shifts to the normal state (low probability / low base state), the left-handed display is configured to start, and the left-handed display is started. The display mode (for example, the display color) of the display may be changed to execute the set value suggestion effect. When the control of the game state is switched in some form in this way, the set value suggestion effect may be configured to be executable.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 076IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 076IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 076IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step 076IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a display command in which the large winning opening is open (step 076IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 is the number of winnings for counting the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening during the round of the big hit game. The value of the counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 076IWS634). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the big winning opening opening flag that specifies that the big winning opening is being opened (the round period during the big hit game) (step 076IWS635).

In this example, by executing the process of step 076IWS634, the value of the winning number counter is cleared to 0 at the timing of receiving the large winning opening opening display command (timing to start the round), which is extremely rare. Even if an over-winning is detected during the interval period after the end of the round period, the value is counted in the winning number counter.

If the received effect control command is a display command after opening the large winning opening (step 076IWS636), the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag after opening the large winning opening that specifies that it is an interval period after opening the large winning opening. (Step 076IWS637).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 076IWS638), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start lighting the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 (step 076IWS639).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 076IWS640), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 (step 076IWS641).

If the received effect control command is a low accuracy / non-KT background specification command (step 076IWS642), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example, Control to display the image (blue background image) (step 076IWS643). If the effect control CPU 120 is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step 076IWS644). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is a prize for counting the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning the big prize opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability / second KT state. If the ball count counter is set, the value of the prize ball counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 076IWS645).

In this example, a game ball wins in the big winning opening during a big hit game (except during a big hit game based on a 2R probability variable big hit or a 2R normal big hit), or a game is played in a special winning opening during a high probability / second KT state. The value of the prize ball counter is cumulatively updated when a ball wins a prize (see steps 076IWS660 and S667), but the game state is low probability / due to the processing of step 076IWS645 being executed. The value of the prize ball counter is cleared to 0 when the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed after the high base state (low probability / first KT state) is reached and the low probability / low base state is reached.

If the received effect control command is a low accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 076IWS646), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the low probability / first KT state (for example, The display is controlled by the green background image) (step 076IWS647). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 076IWS648), and if set, the high probability state flag indicating that the state is in the high probability state and the second KT state indicating that the state is in the second KT state. Reset the 2KT status flag (step 076IWS649).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 076IWS650), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the high probability / first KT state (for example, The display is controlled by the yellow background image) (step 076IWS651). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 076IWS652), and resets the second KT state flag if set (step 076IWS653).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / second KT background designation command (step 076IWS654), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the high probability / second KT state (for example,). The display is controlled by the red background image) (step 076IWS655). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 076IWS656), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 076IWS657).

If the received effect control command is a big prize opening prize designation command (step 076IWS658), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a big hit game based on a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot is in progress. (Step 076IWS659). Whether or not the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, or the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot is in progress is determined by, for example, whether the value of the effect control process flag is during the jackpot effect process (step S176) to the ending effect process (step S177). ), And also check whether the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 2 specified command to the display result 4 specified command. It can be judged by.

During a big hit game based on a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 076IWS660). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after addition (step 076IWS661). The prize ball number display is a display of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning the big prize opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability / second KT state.

By executing the processes of steps 076IWS658 to S661, in this example, the prize ball is based on the fact that a prize is generated in the big winning opening during the big hit game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot. The value of the number counter and the number of prize balls display are updated. On the other hand, even during the big hit game, if a prize is made to the big prize opening during the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit, the value of the prize ball counter is not updated and the prize ball is not updated. The number display is also not updated.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the over-winning suggestion effect process for determining and executing the over-winning suggestion effect (step 076IWS662). It should be noted that the "over-winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at the timing when the over-winning to the large winning opening occurs and suggests the currently set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number display suggestion effect process for determining and executing the prize ball number display suggestion effect (step 076IWS663). In addition, in the "Prize ball number display suggestion effect", the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning a prize in the big prize opening or the special winning opening during the big hit game or the high probability / second KT state is predetermined. It is an effect that is executed at the timing when the number (in this example, 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666) is reached, and suggests the currently set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number emphasizing effect process for determining and executing the prize ball number emphasizing effect (step 076IWS664). In the "Prize ball number emphasis production", the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning a prize in the big prize opening or the special winning opening during the big hit game or the high probability / second KT state is a predetermined number. (In this example, 1000 pieces, 2000 pieces, 3000 pieces, 4000 pieces, 5000 pieces) is highlighted.

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 076IWS665), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 076IWS666). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the high probability / second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 076IWS667). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 076IWS668).

By executing the process of steps 076IWS665-S668, in this example, the value of the prize ball counter and the prize ball are based on the fact that a small hit occurs during the high probability / second KT state and a prize is generated in the special winning opening. The number display is updated. On the other hand, even in the KT state, if a special prize is won during the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, the value of the prize ball counter is not updated. The prize ball number display is also not updated (however, only the value of the prize ball counter is not updated, and the value of the prize ball counter is not reset).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the small hit winning suggestion effect process for determining and executing the small hit winning suggestion effect (step 076IWS669). It should be noted that the "small hit winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at the timing when a small hit occurs during the high probability / second KT state and a prize is generated in the special winning opening, and suggests the currently set value. ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 076IWS663 and executes the prize ball number display suggestion effect process (step 076IWS663). Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number emphasizing effect process (step 076IWS664).

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol specification commands (step 076IWS670), the effect control CPU 120 first transmits the received symbol specification command to the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122. It is stored in the storage area of (step 076IWS671).

If the received effect control command is one of the variable category commands (step 076IWS672), the effect control CPU 120 uses the received variable category command in the storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122. It is stored in the storage area where the latest symbol specification command is stored (step 076IWS673).

If the received effect control command is the first valid start prize designation command or the second valid start prize designation command (step 076IWS674), the effect control CPU 120 receives the first valid start prize designation command or the second valid start prize designation command. The designated command is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and the variable category command are stored in the storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 076IWS675).

By executing the process of steps 076IWS670 to S675, in this example, when the start winning is generated, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the valid start winning designation command (first valid start) are executed in the start winning command storage area. The winning designation command and the second valid start winning designation command) are stored in association with each other.

The first start winning command storage area corresponding to the first hold storage and the second start winning command storage area corresponding to the second hold storage may be separately provided. Then, in this case, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the first effective start prize designation command are stored in association with each other in the first start winning command storage area, and the symbol designation is performed in the second start winning command storage area. The command, the variable category command, and the second effective start winning designation command may be configured to be stored in association with each other.

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 076IWS676). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS611.

(Suggestion production processing at the time of over winning)
FIG. 9-28 is a flowchart showing the suggestion effect processing (step 076IWS662) at the time of over winning. In the over-winning suggestion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first adds 1 to the value of the winning number counter (step 076IWS301). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter after addition is 11 or more (step 076IWS302). If the value of the winning number counter is 11 or more (that is, if an over-winning to the large winning opening has occurred), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence and type of the over-winning suggestion effect. A lottery process based on a random number is performed using the over-winning suggestion effect determination table, and the presence / absence and type of the over-winning suggestion effect are determined (step 076IWS303).

FIG. 9-29 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of over winning. As shown in FIG. 9-29, in the over-winning suggestion effect determination table, there is no over-winning suggestion effect, over-winning suggestion effect A, over-winning suggestion effect B, over-winning suggestion effect C, and over-winning. Judgment values are assigned to the suggestion effect D, the suggestion effect E at the time of over winning, and the suggestion effect F at the time of over winning.

As shown in FIGS. 9-29, in this example, when the game ball wins in the large winning opening, the winning display (in this example, "+15") is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. (Character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9-29, when the "over-winning suggestion effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R outputs a winning sound of sound A different from the normal sound. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect B" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R win a sound B different from the normal sound. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect C" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R win a sound C different from the normal sound. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R win a sound D different from the normal sound. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect E" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R win a sound E different from the normal sound. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect F" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and the sound F different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output.

As shown in FIGS. 9-29, different determination values are assigned to the over-winning suggestion effect determination table depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" the current set value is. In step 076IWS303, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 076IWS615) and specifies the current set value. Then, the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect at the time of over winning are determined based on the determination value corresponding to the specified set value.

As shown in FIGS. 9-29, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect B at the time of over winning is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect C at the time of over winning is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect D at the time of over winning is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "5", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect E at the time of over winning is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect F at the time of over winning is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-29, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect, which is the sum of the over-winning suggestion effects A to F, is determined. 10% + 8% + 7% + 5% + 5% + 5% = 40%, 45% when the set value is "2", 50% when the set value is "3", and the set value. When it is "4", it is 55%, when it is the set value "5", it is 60%, and when it is the set value "6", it is 65%. As described above, in this example, since over-winning occurs relatively rarely, the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is relatively high as compared with the small hit-winning suggestion effect described later. There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is determined in step 076IWS303 (step 076IWS304). If it is determined to execute the over-winning suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect (step 076IWS305). .. For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of over winning, the image display device 5 controls to display the winning display in the blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output a winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect (step 076IWS306). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of over winning, the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter is 10 or less (N in step 076IWS302) or when it is determined that there is no suggestion effect at the time of over winning (N in step 076IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device 5. In the normal display color (white in this example), the winning display is controlled to be displayed (step 076IWS307). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 076IWS308).

(Suggestion production processing at the time of small hit prize)
FIG. 9-30 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect processing (step 076IWS669) at the time of winning a small hit. In the small hit winning suggestion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the small hit winning suggestion effect. This is performed to determine the presence / absence and type of suggestive effect at the time of winning a small hit (step 076IWS321).

FIG. 9-31 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of winning a small hit. As shown in FIG. 9-31, in the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table, there is no small hit winning suggestion effect, small hit winning suggestion effect A, small hit winning suggestion effect B, and small hit winning suggestion effect. Judgment values are assigned to C, the small hit winning suggestion effect D, the small hit winning suggestion effect E, and the small hit winning suggestion effect F, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 9-31, in this example, when the game ball wins in the special winning opening, the winning display (in this example, "+10") is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. (Character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9-31, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5, and the speaker is displayed. A winning sound of sound A different from the normal sound is output from 8L and 8R. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect B" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5, and the sound B different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect C" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5, and the sound C different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5, and the sound D different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect E" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5, and the sound E different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect F" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and the sound F different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound of is output.

As shown in FIG. 9-31, different judgment values are assigned to the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" the current set value is. .. In step 076IWS321, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 076IWS615) and specifies the current set value. Then, the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small hit is determined based on the determination value corresponding to the specified set value.

As shown in FIGS. 9-31, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect B is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect C at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect D at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "5", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect E at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect F at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-31, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A to F, which is the sum of the small hit winning suggestion effects A to F. Is 2% + 1% + 1% + 1% = 5%, 6% when the set value is "2", 7% when the set value is "3", and the set value "4". When it is, it is 8%, when it is the set value "5", it is 9%, and when it is the set value "6", it is 10%. As described above, in this example, the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is relatively low as compared with the over-winning suggestion effect already described.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is determined in step 076IWS321 (step 076IWS322). If the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect (step). 076IWS323). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of a small hit winning, the image display device 5 controls to display the winning display in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output a winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect (step 076IWS324). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of a small hit winning, the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no suggestion effect at the time of winning a small hit (N in step 076IWS322), the effect control CPU 120 displays the winning display in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. (Step 076IWS325). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 076IWS326).

It should be noted that the reliability of the set value suggestion may be different depending on whether the suggestion effect at the time of over winning is executed or the suggestion effect at the time of small hit winning is executed. For example, the over-winning suggestion effect F can be executed at any of the set values "1" to "6", but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is "6", whereas the small hit If the suggestion effect F at the time of winning is executed, it may be configured so that the set value "6" is confirmed. On the contrary, for example, the small hit winning suggestion effect F can be executed at any of the set values "1" to "6", but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is "6". On the other hand, if the suggestion effect F at the time of over winning is executed, the set value "6" may be determined.

Further, in this example, the over-winning suggestion effect and the small hit-winning suggestion effect make the display mode of the winning display (display color in this example) different from the usual one, and output a winning sound different from the usual one. The case where it is executed by the aspect is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, by setting only one of the winning display display mode (display color in this example) and the winning sound to be different from the normal mode, the over winning suggestion effect and the small hit winning suggestion effect are executed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, for example, by displaying the effect display at the timing of the occurrence of over winning or the occurrence of winning in the special winning opening, or by changing the display color of the lamp or LED, a suggestion effect at the time of over winning or a small hit winning It may be configured to perform a time suggestion effect.

(Prize ball number display suggestion production processing)
FIG. 9-32 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing (step 076IWS663). In the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 456 first (step 076IWS341). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 076IWS341, for effect control. If the value of the prize ball counter is 465, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 456 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value “4” or more (step 076IWS342). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 076IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "4" or more, the effect control CPU 120 uses a prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect, and draws lots based on random numbers. The process is performed to determine the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A (step 076IWS343). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS359.

FIG. 9-33 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed, a character display such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "4" or more. As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed only when the set value is the set value "4" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed, at least the set value "4" is executed. It will be confirmed that it is more than that.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 first (N in step 076IWS341), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first (N). Step 076IWS344). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 076IWS344, the effect is controlled. If the value of the prize ball counter is 555, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 555 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more (step 076IWS345). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 076IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "5" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect B. Is determined (step 076IWS346). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed, a character display such as "555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "5" or more. As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed only when the set value is the set value "5" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed, at least the set value "5" is executed. It will be confirmed that it is more than that.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first (N in step 076IWS344), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first (N). Step 076IWS347). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 076IWS347, the effect is controlled. If the value of the prize ball counter is 675, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 666 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" (step 076IWS348). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 076IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect C. Determine (step 076IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, a character display such as "666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "6". As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is determined with a probability of 1%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed only when the set value is the set value "6". Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, the set value "6" is used. It will be confirmed that there is.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first (N in step 076IWS347), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first (N). Step 076IWS350). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added in increments of 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 076IWS350, the effect control CPU 120 determines the prize ball if the value of the prize ball counter is 2460 or 2465. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2456 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more (step 076IWS351). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 076IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "4" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect D. Is determined (step 076IWS352). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed, a character display such as "2456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "4" or more. As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is determined with a probability of 5%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed only when the set value is the set value "4" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed, the set value "4" is executed. It will be confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first (N in step 076IWS350), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first (N). Step 076IWS353). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 076IWS353, the effect control CPU 120 determines the prize ball if the value of the prize ball counter is 2555 or 2560. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2555 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more (step 076IWS354). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 076IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "5" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect E. Is determined (step 076IWS355). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed, a character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "5" or more. As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed only when the set value is the set value "5" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed, the set value "5" is executed. It will be confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first (N in step 076IWS353), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first (N). Step 076IWS356). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 076IWS356, the effect control CPU 120 determines the prize ball if the value of the prize ball counter is 2670 or 2675. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2666 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" (step 076IWS357). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 076IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F. Determine (step 076IWS358). Then, the process proceeds to step 076IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed, a character display such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "6". As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed only when the set value is the set value "6". Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed, the set value "6" is used. It will be confirmed that there is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is determined in step 076IWS343, S346, S349, S352, S355, S358 (step 076IWS359). If the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number display suggestion effect (step 076IWS360). For example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect A, the image display device 5 controls to display a character display such as "456 OVER".

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-33, when viewed from the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the big hit game, the period during the big hit game becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect decreases to 3%, 2%, and 1%, while the set value "4" or more is confirmed, the set value "5" or more is confirmed, and the set value " 6 ”The accuracy of confirmation and suggestion of set values is increasing. Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-33, the prize ball number display suggestion effects D to F executed during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) show that the small hit RUSH is in progress. As the period of the prize balls increases and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect decreases to 5%, 3%, and 2%, while the set value "4" or more is confirmed and the set value. The accuracy of confirming "5" or more, confirming the set value "6", and suggesting the set value is increasing.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH increases and the number of prize balls increases, the probability of executing the prize ball number display suggestion effect increases. It may be configured to go. Further, for example, as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the accuracy of suggesting the set value may decrease.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-33, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the big hit game and the prize ball number display suggestion executed during the small hit RUSH period. Although the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is different between the effects D to F, it is configured to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect with the same execution probability regardless of such a mode. You may.

(Prize ball number emphasis production processing)
FIG. 9-34 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number emphasizing effect processing (step 076IWS664). In the prize ball number emphasis effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter first reaches the threshold value for each 1000 (1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000 in this example). (Step 076IWS371). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 076IWS371, the effect is controlled. For example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 1000 or 1005, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 1000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 2000 or 2005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 3000 or 3005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 3000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 4000 or 4005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 4000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 5000 or 5005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 5000 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches the threshold value for every 1000 first, the effect control CPU 120 uses a prize ball number emphasis effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number emphasis effect, and is a random number. A lottery process is performed based on the above, and it is determined whether or not the prize ball number emphasis effect is present (step 076IWS372).

FIG. 9-35 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the prize ball number emphasizing effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 9-35, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 1000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect A is determined with a probability of 50%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed, a character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect B is determined with a probability of 60%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is executed, a character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 3000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect C is determined with a probability of 70%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is executed, a character display such as "3000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 4000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect D is determined with a probability of 80%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is executed, a character display such as "4000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 5000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect E is determined with a probability of 90%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is executed, a character display such as "5000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect is determined in step 076IWS372 (step 076IWS373). If the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number emphasizing effect (step 076IWS374). For example, if it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect A, the image display device 5 controls to display a character display such as "1000 OVER".

In this example, when the number of prize balls reaches 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, and 5000, the prize ball number emphasizing effect can be executed. It is not limited to the mode. For example, not only when the prize ball number emphasis effect can be executed in all of these cases, but also when the prize ball number reaches 1000, 2000, and 3000, the prize ball number emphasis effect can be executed. It may be configured. Further, for example, even when the number of prize balls reaches 6000 or 7000, the prize ball number emphasizing effect may be configured to be executable, and various aspects can be considered.

As shown in FIGS. 9-34 and 9-35, the prize ball number emphasizing effect is different from the prize ball number display suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 9-32 and 9-33, and is irrelevant to the current set value. It is a production that is decided and executed. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, by changing the display mode of the prize ball number emphasizing effect, the prize ball number emphasizing effect may be configured to be feasible in a mode suggesting the current set value. For example, the current set value may be suggested by displaying a character display such as "1000 OVER" or "2000 OVER" in a display color different from the usual one.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 9-36 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command has been received (step 076IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). In step 076IWS811, it may be confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 076IWS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the variation display of the first special symbol. (Step 076IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 076IWS815).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol. (Step 076IWS814). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 34. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (that is, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 076IWS815).

By executing the processing of steps 076IWS812 to S815, in the feature unit 076IW, in the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the first special symbol. When it is executed and in the KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state, or even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is in the non-KT state. , The variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 9-37 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the variable display result (step 076IWS921). In step 076IWS921, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the display result 1 designation command (when it is determined to be out of alignment), only the outlier symbol or the left and right decorative symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols do not completely match are received. Determine the combination of matching out-of-reach symbols. In addition, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 10R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols aligned with the symbol "7" among the odd-numbered symbols on the left, middle, and right is determined. Further, when the display result 3 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are odd-numbered symbols other than "7" is determined. In addition, when the display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of symbols whose decorative symbol inside includes a special symbol (in this example, the symbol "R") is determined. .. In addition, when a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are even numbers. To determine. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the decorative symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display this time is out of order (step 076IWS922). To check whether the variable display this time is out of order, for example, check whether the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. Can be determined by. If there is no deviation fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 076IWS926 as it is. If it is out of alignment (Y in step 076IWS922), the effect control CPU 120 executes a set value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. (Step 076IWS923).

In step 076IWS923, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the set value stored in the set value storage area (see step 076IWS615). Then, the effect control CPU 120 uses a table corresponding to the specified set value as a set value suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestion effect, and performs a lottery process based on a random number to set. Determine the presence / absence and type of value suggestion effect.

FIG. 9-38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the set value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 9-38, in the set value suggestion effect determination table, there is no set value suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect A, set value suggestion effect B, set value suggestion effect C, set value suggestion effect D, and set value. Judgment values are assigned to the suggestion effect E and the set value suggestion effect F, respectively.

The set value suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 9-38, the set value “1” is used. In some cases, the execution rate is the highest. Further, the set value suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 9-38, the set value “2”. The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect C is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 9-38, the set value “3” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect D is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 9-38, the set value "4". The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect E is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 9-38, the set value “5” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect F is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 9-38, the set value “ When it is "6", the execution rate is the highest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 076IWS924). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the process proceeds to step 076IWS926 as it is. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 076IWS924), that is, in the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 076IWS925).

FIG. 9-39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-39, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is not determined, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B are determined. A value has been assigned. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a blue display color on the image display device 5. Further, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a red display color on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 9-39, in this example, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest when the set value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest when the set value is "2". The execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is "3", and the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is "4". Is the next highest, and when the set value is "5", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest. It's getting low.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-39, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the set value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is when the set value is "6". Execution rate is the highest.

In this example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the set value is "1", and the jackpot probability is the highest when the set value is "6". However, when the second KT state is in the state, the jackpot occurs. Since the second KT state may end as an opportunity, the setting value "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (the probability of continuation is high), and the setting value "6" is set. In some cases, it can be said that the second KT state is the setting state in which it is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low). Therefore, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

As described above, the continuation expectation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the expectation that the control period to the second KT state will be extended without the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest. Therefore, especially when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed. It is possible to further increase the expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current gaming state is a normal state (low probability / low base state) (step 076IWS926). Whether or not it is in the normal state is determined by checking whether or not the high probability state flag, the first KT state flag, and the second KT state flag (see steps 076IWS648, S652, and S656) are set. If none of them are set, it can be determined that the normal state is reached. If the gaming state is the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 executes the button advance notice effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the button advance notice effect (step 076IWS927).

In step 076IWS927, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the button advance notice effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the button advance notice effect, and determines the presence / absence and type of the button advance notice effect.

FIG. 9-40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the button notice effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-40, determination values are assigned to the button advance notice effect determination table for each of the button advance notice effect no effect, the button advance notice effect A execution, and the button advance notice effect B execution. The "button notice effect A" is, for example, a notice effect that displays an operation promotion display prompting the operation of the push button 31B in a blue display color and then displays a notice display based on the detection of a pressing operation by the push button 31B. Is. Further, the "button notice effect B" is, for example, a notice effect of displaying the operation promotion display in a red display color and then displaying the notice display based on the detection of the pressing operation by the push button 31B.

As shown in FIG. 9-40, in this example, when the button notice effect (button notice effect A, button notice effect B) is executed, it is a big hit as compared with the case where the button notice effect is not executed. The degree of expectation (reliability) for is high. Further, when the button notice effect B is executed among the button notice effects, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than that when the button notice effect A is executed.

In addition, in this example, the case where the button notice effect is configured to be executable only in the normal state (low probability / low base state) is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the button notice effect may be executed even during the low probability / high base state (first KT state) or the high probability / high base state (first KT state), that is, the first KT state. Further, even in the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the button notice effect may be configured to be executable with a very low probability.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot battle effect setting process for setting the execution of the battle effect executed at the time of the jackpot (step 076IWS928).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a small hit advance notice effect setting process for setting the execution of the small hit advance notice effect (in this example, the small hit advance suggestion effect and the battle effect) (step 076IWS929).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used, the set value suggestion effect, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, the battle effect, and the small hit notice effect based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. When it is decided to execute, a process table corresponding to the set value suggestion effect, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, the battle effect, and the small hit advance notice effect is selected (step 076IWS930).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 076IWS930 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 076IWS931). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 076IWS932). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

When it is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect, step 076IWS932 and the variable display effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 076IWS930. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol (during the deviation fluctuation).

Further, when it is decided to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 076IWS932 and the variable display during effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 076IWS930. As a result, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol (during the deviation variation in the second KT state).

Further, when it is decided to execute the button notice effect, step 076IWS932 and the variable display effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the button notice effect selected in step 076IWS930, so that the decorative pattern is displayed. The button notice effect is executed during the variable display (during the normal state).

Further, when it is decided to execute the battle effect, the decorative symbol is changed and displayed by executing step 076IWS932 and the variable display effect process (step S172) according to the process table including the battle effect selected in step 076IWS930. The battle effect is executed in the middle (high probability / low base state (second KT state) middle).

Further, when it is decided to execute the small hit advance suggestion effect described later, step 076IWS932 and the variable display in-effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small hit advance suggestion effect selected in step 076IWS930. As a result, the small hit advance suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol (during the high probability / low base state (second KT state)).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer (step 076IWS933). Next, the effect control CPU 101 is stored in the first storage area of the start winning command storage area, and the start winning command (symbol designation command, variable category command, and valid start winning designation command (first valid). The start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command)) are deleted, and the contents of the start prize command storage area are shifted (step 076IWS934).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S172) during variable display (step 076IWS935).

(Battle production setting processing at the time of big hit)
FIG. 9-41 is a flowchart showing the big hit battle effect setting process (step 076IWS928). In the big hit battle effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command is the second variation pattern # 21 (see FIG. 9-6 (I)). (Step 076IWS501). If it is the second fluctuation pattern # 21 (that is, if the jackpot fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 2 minutes is performed during the high probability / low base state (second KT state)), the jackpot type of the effect control CPU 120 is It is confirmed whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot) (step 076IWS502). Whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area (see step 076IWS620).

If it is a probabilistic jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the battle effect (victory) in which the ally character wins the battle against the enemy character in the variable display started this time (step 076IWS503). On the other hand, if it is not a probabilistic jackpot (that is, if it is a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot, 2R normal jackpot)), the effect control CPU 120 will battle the ally character against the enemy character in the variable display that starts this time. The execution of the battle production (defeat) in the mode of being defeated in is determined (step 076IWS504).

By executing the above processing, in this example, if the battle effect is executed during the high probability / low base state (second KT state) and the battle effect in which the ally character wins is executed, the probability changes. It is suggested that the probability change state will continue as a big hit, and if the battle effect in which the ally character is defeated is executed, it will be a normal jackpot and the probability change state will end.

(Small hit notice effect setting process)
FIG. 9-42 is a flowchart showing the small hit notice effect setting process (step 076IWS929). In the small hit notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 076IWS511). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the high probability / low base state (second KT state)), the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of small hits in the second hold storage during notification. It is confirmed whether or not the value of the small hit number counter for counting is 0 (step 076IWS512).

If the value of the small hit number counter is 0 (that is, if the number of small hits in the second hold storage currently being notified is 0), the effect control CPU 120 indicates the received fluctuation pattern command. It is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern to be generated is the second fluctuation pattern # 21 (see FIG. 9-6 (I)) (step 076IWS513). If it is the second fluctuation pattern # 21 (that is, if the fluctuation display started this time is a jackpot fluctuation), the process is terminated as it is. If it is not the second fluctuation pattern # 21 (that is, if the fluctuation display started this time is a small hit fluctuation), the effect control CPU 120 uses the second fluctuation pattern # 20 (that is, the fluctuation pattern indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command). It is confirmed whether or not it is (see FIG. 9-6 (I)) (step 076IWS514).

If it is not the second fluctuation pattern # 20 (that is, if the small hit fluctuation starting this time is a fluctuation display with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds or 5 seconds (that is, the second fluctuation pattern # in FIG. 9-6 (I)). 18, # 19)), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current second reserved storage number is 1 (step 076IWS515). If the current number of second hold storages is 1, the process ends as it is.

In this example, if there is only one second hold memory that is a small hit, the second hold memory is immediately digested. Therefore, the process of step 076IWS5153 is executed to perform a small hit. The case where the advance suggestion effect, the small hit count suggestion effect, and the gauge display are not performed at all is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, since there is time to display the gauge display although it is a short time, the second hold memory that becomes a small hit until the small hit advance suggestion effect or the small hit number suggestion effect is executed or the fluctuation display is completed is stored. It may be configured to display a gauge display indicating that the number is one.

If the current second hold storage number is not 1 (that is, if the current second hold storage number is 2 or more), the effect control CPU 120 is a variable category command stored in the start winning command storage area. Of these, all those corresponding to the second reserved storage are extracted (step 076IWS516). Specifically, among the variable category commands stored in the start winning command storage area, all the variable category commands stored in association with the second effective starting winning designation command are extracted.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not any of the read variable category commands stored in the second and subsequent variable category commands has the second variation patterns # 20 and # 21. (Step 076IWS517). If there are second fluctuation patterns # 20 and # 21 (that is, if there is a second fluctuation memory with a fluctuation time of 2 minutes and a battle effect), the process is terminated as it is.

When the second hold memory having a long fluctuation time of 2 minutes is stored by executing the process of step 076IWS517, the small hit advance suggestion effect, the small hit number suggestion effect, and the gauge display are not performed. I have to. That is, if the fluctuation time is as long as 2 minutes, the battle effect may be executed and a big hit may occur. Therefore, if the number of small hits is notified in such a state, there is a second hold memory that becomes a big hit. There is a risk that the player will recognize that. Therefore, in this example, when the second hold memory having a long fluctuation time of 2 minutes is stored, the small hit advance suggestion effect, the small hit number suggestion effect, and the gauge display are not performed. .. Even in such a case, the number of small hits before the second hold memory with a long fluctuation time is counted, and the small hit advance suggestion effect, the small hit number suggestion effect, and the gauge display are performed. It may be configured.

If there is no second fluctuation pattern # 20 or # 21 (that is, if there is only a small hit fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds or 5 seconds in the second hold memory), the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 sets the current second hold storage number in the small hit number counter (step 076IWS518). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of small hit advance suggestion effect that suggests that a small hit will occur in advance according to the value of the small hit number counter (step 076IWS519).

In step 076IWS519, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the small hit advance suggestion effect determination table for determining the type of the small hit advance suggestion effect, and determines the type of the advance suggestion effect.

FIG. 9-43 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the small hit prior suggestion effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 9-43 (A) shows a specific example of the small hit advance suggestion effect determination table for the small hit number 2 selected when the value of the small hit number counter is 2. Further, FIG. 9-43 (B) shows a specific example of the small hit advance suggestion effect determination table for the small hit number 3 selected when the value of the small hit number counter is 3. Further, FIG. 9-43 (C) shows a specific example of the small hit advance suggestion effect determination table for the small hit number 4 selected when the value of the small hit number counter is 4. As shown in FIGS. 9-43, judgment values are assigned to the small hit advance suggestion effect A, the small hit advance suggestion effect B, and the small hit advance suggestion effect C in the small hit advance suggestion effect determination table. ing.

The "small hit advance suggestion effect A" is, for example, a small hit advance suggestion effect executed in a mode in which the background image changes. Further, the "small hit advance suggestion effect B" is, for example, a small hit advance suggestion effect executed in a mode of displaying an operation promotion display prompting the operation of the push button 31B in a blue display color. Further, the "small hit advance suggestion effect C" is, for example, a small hit advance suggestion effect executed in a mode in which the operation promotion display is displayed in a red display color.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-43 (A), when the number of small hits is 2, the execution rate of the small hit advance suggestion effect A is the highest. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-43 (B), when the number of small hits is 3, the execution rate of the small hit advance suggestion effect B is the highest. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-43 (C), when the number of small hits is 4, the execution rate of the small hit advance suggestion effect C is the highest. Therefore, in this example, when the small hit advance suggestion effect C is executed, it is expected that 4 which is the largest number of small hits is notified, and when the small hit advance suggestion effect B is executed, the small hit advance suggestion effect B is executed. It can be expected that 3 which is the next largest number of small hits will be notified.

By executing the above processing, in this example, when the small hit fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds or 5 seconds is executed during the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the first 2 If there is only a small hit fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds or 5 seconds in the reserved memory, the small hit advance suggestion effect is executed in the fluctuation display started this time.

In this example, if there is only a small hit fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds or 5 seconds in the second reserved storage in step 076IWS517, a case where the small hit advance suggestion effect is always executed is shown. However, it may be configured so that the small hit advance suggestion effect may not be executed at a low rate.

In addition, the types of small hit advance suggestion effects are not limited to those shown in this example. For example, it may be configured to display an operation promotion display prompting the operation of different types of operation means (for example, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B) depending on the type of the small hit advance suggestion effect. Conceivable.

If the second fluctuation pattern # 20 in step 076IWS514 (that is, if the small hit fluctuation starting this time is a fluctuation display with a long fluctuation time of 2 minutes), the effect control CPU 120 has the current second hold storage number. It is confirmed whether or not it is 1 (step 076IWS520). If the current second hold storage number is 1, the effect control CPU 120 executes a battle effect (draw) in which the battle between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw in the variable display started this time. Is determined (step 076IWS521).

In this example, if there is only one second hold memory that is a small hit, the second hold memory is immediately digested. Therefore, the process of steps 076IWS520 and S521 is executed. It shows the case where the battle effect (draw) is executed and the small hit count suggestion effect and the gauge display are not performed at all, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, since there is time to display the gauge display although it is a short time, it is determined that there is only one second hold memory that is a small hit until the small hit number suggestion effect is executed or the fluctuation display is completed. It may be configured to display a gauge display to indicate.

If the current second hold storage number is not 1 (that is, if the current second hold storage number is 2 or more), the effect control CPU 120 is a variable category command stored in the start winning command storage area. Of these, all those corresponding to the second reserved storage are extracted (step 076IWS522). Specifically, among the variable category commands stored in the start winning command storage area, all the variable category commands stored in association with the second effective starting winning designation command are extracted.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not any of the read variable category commands stored in the second and subsequent variable category commands has the second variation patterns # 20 and # 21. (Step 076IWS523). If there are second fluctuation patterns # 20 and # 21 (that is, if there is a second holding memory with a long fluctuation time of 2 minutes and a battle effect), the effect control CPU 120 starts this time. In the variable display, the execution of the battle effect (draw) in which the battle between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw is determined (step 076IWS524).

When the process of steps 076IWS523 and S524 is executed and the second hold memory having a long fluctuation time of 2 minutes is stored, a battle effect (draw) is executed, and a small hit number suggestion effect and a gauge are executed. It is not displayed. That is, if the fluctuation time is as long as 2 minutes, the battle effect may be executed and a big hit may occur. Therefore, if the number of small hits is notified in such a state, there is a second hold memory that becomes a big hit. There is a risk that the player will recognize that. Therefore, in this example, when the second hold memory having a long fluctuation time of 2 minutes is stored, the small hit number suggestion effect and the gauge display are not performed. Even in such a case, the number of small hits before the second hold storage with a long fluctuation time may be counted, and the small hit number suggestion effect and the gauge display may be performed.

If there is no second fluctuation pattern # 20 or # 21 (that is, if there is only a small hit fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds or 5 seconds in the second hold memory), the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 sets the current second hold storage number in the small hit number counter (step 076IWS525). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the battle effect (victory) in which the ally character wins the battle against the enemy character in the variable display started this time (step 076IWS503).

By executing the above processing, in this example, even if the fluctuation display started this time is a small hit (even if it is not a probability variation big hit), the number of small hits during the fluctuation display. The battle effect (victory) may be executed when is notified.

(Variable display production processing)
9-44 and 9-45 are flowcharts showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 076IWS8101) and 1 subtracts the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 076IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 076IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 076IWS8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 076IWS8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 076IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first 1 Confirm whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 076IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 076IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether the first forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 076IWS8108). If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 076IWS921 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 076IWS8109). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 076IWS8110).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 076IWS8106 (that is, if it is in the KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the second symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first 2 Confirm whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 076IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 076IWS8114).

If the second symbol confirmation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the second forced symbol confirmation command (for example, whether the second forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 076IWS8112). If the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 076IWS921 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 076IWS8113). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 076IWS8114).

If neither the first forced symbol confirmation command nor the second forced symbol confirmation command is received (N in steps 076IWS8108 and S8112), the effect control CPU 120 starts the button advance effect or the small hit advance suggestion effects B and C. It is confirmed whether or not the timing is reached (step 076IWS8115). Whether or not it is the start timing of the button notice effect or the small hit advance suggestion effect B or C is determined by, for example, checking the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer set in step 076IWS933 of the variable display start setting process. Can be determined by.

If it is the start timing of the button notice effect or the small hit advance suggestion effect B or C, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display color in the image display device 5 according to the type of the button advance effect or the small hit advance suggestion effect. Control to display the operation promotion display (step 076IWS8116). In this case, when the button notice effect A or the small hit advance suggestion effect B is executed, the operation promotion display is displayed in the blue display color. Further, when the button notice effect B or the small hit advance suggestion effect C is executed, the operation promotion display is displayed in the red display color.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the button advance notice effect is being executed (step 076IWS8117). If the button advance notice effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected (specifically, whether or not the detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input). (Step 076IWS8118). If the pressing operation of the push button 31B is not detected, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period of the button notice effect has elapsed (step 076IWS8119). Whether or not the effect period of the button notice effect has elapsed can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer set in step 076IWS933 of the variable display start setting process.

If the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected (Y in step 076IWS8118), or if the effect period of the button advance notice effect has passed (Y in step 076IWS8119), the effect control CPU 120 is used in the image display device 5. , Control to display a predetermined notice display (step 076IWS8120). In this case, for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "extreme heat" or "chance" that suggests the possibility of a big hit.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit advance suggestion effect is being executed (step 076IWS8121). If the small hit advance suggestion effect is being executed, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has detected the pressing operation of the push button 31B (specifically, whether or not the detection signal from the push sensor 35B has been input). Is confirmed (step 076IWS8122). If the pressing operation of the push button 31B is not detected, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period of the small hit advance suggestion effect has elapsed (step 076IWS8123). It should be noted that whether or not the effect period of the small hit advance suggestion effect has elapsed can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer set in step 076IWS933 of the variable display start setting process.

If the effect period of the small hit prior suggestion effect has not elapsed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the execution timing of the other small hit number suggestion effect (step 076IWS8124). Specifically, in the case of executing the small hit advance suggestion effect A, if it is the end timing of the small hit advance suggestion effect A, it is the execution timing of the other small hit number suggestion effect. judge. Further, in the case of executing the battle effect (win) in the small hit fluctuation (see step 076IWS526), if the end timing of the battle effect (win) is reached, the execution timing of the other small hit number suggestion effect Judge that it is.

If the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected (Y in step 076IWS8122), or if the effect period of the button advance notice effect has passed (Y in step 076IWS8123), or the execution timing of the other small hit count suggestion effect. If (Y in step 076IWS8124), the effect control CPU 120 suggests the number of small hits according to the value of the small hit number counter in the image display device 5 (suggests the number of small hits in the second hold storage). Control is performed to execute (notifying) the effect (step 076IWS8125). In this case, for example, if the value of the small hit number counter is 2, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "small hit + 2 times!". Further, for example, if the value of the small hit number counter is 3, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "small hit + 3 times!". Further, for example, if the value of the small hit number counter is 4, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "small hit + 4 times!".

Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the gauge display according to the value of the small hit number counter in the image display device 5 (step 076IWS8126).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out (step 076IWS8127). If the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the process data for the standby effect (step 076IWS8128). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 076IWS8129).

In this example, as described above, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation big hit, is being executed. In the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation big hit, is being executed, during the small hit game. , The update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decorative symbol variation time timer timed out in step 076IWS8127 without receiving any of the symbol confirmation designation commands means that the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is interrupted in this way, and the first This is the case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the processing of steps 076IWS8128 and S8129 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and then the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is restarted, and finally one special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is completed. The "standby effect" is, for example, an effect in which the image display device 5 puts the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right into a temporary stop state in a state of shaking fluctuation or slight fluctuation.

For example, in the image display device 5, when the fluctuation display of the system small symbol or the fourth symbol is also executed, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the first special When the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these system small symbols and the fourth special symbol is also continuously executed. Then, when the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is restarted and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these system small symbols and the fourth symbol are displayed. The fluctuation display is also stopped.

(Waiting processing per special figure)
9-46 and 9-47 are flowcharts showing the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 076IWS9701). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 076IWS9706. In this feature unit 076IW, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 076IWS9705. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the jackpot effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the jackpot has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 076IWS9703 is performed. The process proceeds to step 076IWS9706 without execution.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 076IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 076IWS9717. In the feature unit 076IW, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step 076IWS9716. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the small hit medium effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the small hit medium effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 076IWS9703 is displayed. The process proceeds to step 076IWS9717 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols being stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. , Small hit symbol) is controlled to be fixedly displayed (step 076IWS9703). When the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received and the process of replacing with the misaligned symbol is executed in steps 076IWS8109 and S8113, the effect control CPU 120 is deviated from the symbol in step 076IWS9703. Is controlled to be confirmed and displayed.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 076IWS9703 (Y in step 076IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 076IWS9705).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 076IWS9706). When the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 076IWS9707).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the prize ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 076IWS9708). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot type of the jackpot generated this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot (step 076IWS9709). Whether or not the jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot is determined by, for example, whether or not the received display result specification command is a display result 2 designation command to a display result 4 designation command. It can be judged by checking. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the prize ball number display (step 076IWS9710).

By executing the processes of steps 076IWS9708 to S9710, in this example, the display of the number of prize balls is started when the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot is started. On the other hand, even if it is a big hit, the display of the number of prize balls is not started when the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit is started.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 076IWS9711). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 076IWS9712), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 076IWS9713).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step S176) (step 076IWS9714).

If the big hit symbol is not confirmed and displayed in the process of step 076IWS9703 (N in step 076IWS9704), and if the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 076IWS9703 (Y in step 076IWS9715), the effect control CPU 120 is stopped. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 076IWS9716).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 076IWS9717). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 076IWS9718).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step 076IWS9719). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 076IWS9720), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 076IWS9721).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 076IWS9722). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a high probability / low base state (second KT state)), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit number counter (step 076IWS9723). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to update the gauge display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the small hit number counter after subtraction (step 076IWS9724).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 076IWS9722 to S9724, the value of the small hit number counter is subtracted at the end of the variation display, and the gauge display scale is reduced by one. Therefore, when the small hit count suggestion effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation and the gauge display is started, the first small hit is immediately generated at the end of the fluctuation display and the scale of the gauge display is reduced by one. Will be done.

In addition, not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, the value of the small hit number counter may be subtracted at the start of fluctuation to reduce the scale of the gauge display by one, and various modes can be considered. Be done.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step S174) (step 076IWS9725).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 076IWS9703 (that is, when the missed symbol is displayed) (N in step 076IWS9704 and N in step 076IWS9715), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 076IWS9726).

(Ending production processing)
9-48 is a flowchart showing the ending effect processing (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 076IWS951). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the jackpot game in the jackpot effect process (see step S176). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 076IWS952).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 076IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 076IWS953), and the effect device (image display device 5) according to the contents of the process data n. , Game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) is executed (step 076IWS954). For example, an effect of displaying the end of the jackpot or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 076IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 076IWS956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 076IWS957).

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 076IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is a jackpot game based on a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot (step). 076IWS958). Whether or not the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot is determined is, for example, whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 3 designation command or the display result 4 designation command. Can be determined by checking. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the display of the prize ball number display (step 076IWS959).

By executing the processes of steps 076IWS958 to S959, in this example, when the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot is executed, the prize ball number display is displayed during the jackpot game, and the jackpot is displayed. The prize ball number display is erased at the end of the game, and the prize ball number display is not displayed during the high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game that ends this time is a jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation jackpot (step 076IWS960). Whether or not it is a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 5 designation command. If it is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the prize ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 076IWS961). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the prize ball number display (step 076IWS962).

By executing the process of steps 076IWS960 to S962, in this example, when the jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation jackpot is executed, the prize ball number display is not displayed during the jackpot game (however, however). In this example, if the prize ball number display is displayed before the 2R probability variation big hit, the prize ball number display is continuously displayed but the display is not updated), and the high probability after the big hit game is completed. / During the 2nd KT state, the prize ball number display is displayed.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 076IWS963).

(Production example)
Next, an effect mode of the effect executed in the feature unit 076IW will be described. First, an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect will be described. 9-49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute the setting value suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. As shown in FIG. 9-49 (A), when the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is being executed on the image display device 5, the execution timing of the set value suggestion effect is determined in FIG. 9-49 (B1). )-(B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-49 (B1) to (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed by displaying the predetermined character image 076IW001,076IW002,076IW003 on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when executing the set value suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (B1), the setting value suggestion effect A is set by displaying a predetermined character image 076IW001 in a blue display color on the image display device 5. The value suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (B2), the set value is set according to the mode in which the predetermined character image 076IW002 is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5. Suggestion production is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect E is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (B3), the set value is set according to the mode in which the predetermined character image 076IW003 is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5. Suggestion production is executed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-49, the case where the set value suggestion effect A, the set value suggestion effect C, and the set value suggestion effect E are executed is shown, but for example, when the set value suggestion effect B is executed. Is displayed with a predetermined character image in a green display color, a predetermined character image is displayed with an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow is displayed when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in a color display color.

In this example, which setting value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image having a different display color is displayed and the setting value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. You can have a sense of expectation for it.

Next, the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 9-50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative symbol that is out of the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

In this example, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-50 (A), for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display 076IW004 such as "small hit RUSH", and the second KT state. It is recognizable that it is inside. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-50 (A), when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-50 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-50 (B1) and 9-50 (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by displaying a predetermined effect image 076IW005, 076IW006 on the image display device 5. In this example, a case where an image of a racing car is displayed as a predetermined effect image 076IW005, 076IW006 is shown. In this case, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-50 (B1), the image display device 5 displays a predetermined effect image 076IW005 in a blue display color. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-50 (B2), a predetermined effect image 076IW005 is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or the effect image of any display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of the second KT state. Depending on whether or not the effect is executed, the player can be expected to continue the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, the display mode of the right-handed notification will be described. FIG. 9-51 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the right-handed notification. In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is performed, the jackpot game is in progress. As shown in FIG. 9-51 (1), the right-handed display 26 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) (see steps 076IWS2018A and S2018B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (1), the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS2019A, S2019B, S639). reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (1), the effect control CPU 120 displays a right-handed display 076IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step 076IWS624).

Further, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (2)) during the small hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on by the CPU 103) (see step 076IWS2024B). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (2), the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command (see steps 076IWS2025B and S639). .. However, unlike during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (2), the right-handed display 076IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (3), the right-handed display 26 is turned on and the right is turned on during the small hit game. The striking notification LED 37 is not lit, and the right-strike display 076IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

Next, the production modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect will be described. 9-52 and 9-53 are explanatory views for explaining the production modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect. In FIGS. 9-52 and 9-53, the display screens change in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-52 and 9-53, there is a case where the jackpot game state is controlled based on the 10R probability variation jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 9-52 (A), during the big hit game, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Big hit!" And the number of rounds such as "Round 2". The prize ball number display 076IW008 is displayed. In addition, when a normal prize (a prize that is not an over prize) occurs in the big prize opening during the big hit game, the prize is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) as shown in FIG. 9-52 (B). 076IW009 (in this example, the character display of "+15") is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 076IWS307 and S308).

Next, it is assumed that an over-winning occurs during the jackpot game, and the execution of the suggestion effect at the time of over-winning is decided based on the occurrence of the over-winning. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-52 (C), the winning display 076IW010 (in this example, the character display of “+15”) is displayed according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R outputs a winning sound according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect (see steps 076IWS305 and S306). For example, when the over-winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 456 and the number of prize balls reaches 456. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-52 (D), the character display 076IW011 such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed (see step 076IWS360).

In this example, the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed is shown. For example, when the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is decided, the image display device 5 sets "555". A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect C, a character display such as "666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (E), when the jackpot game is completed, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state after the jackpot game is completed. Further, when controlled to the high probability / second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (F), a character display such as "Small hit RUSH in progress!" Is displayed, and the prize ball number display 076IW008 continues. Is displayed.

Next, during the high probability / second KT state, a small hit occurs and a game ball is won in the special winning opening, but if it is not decided to execute the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit winning, FIG. 9-53. As shown in (F), the winning display 076IW012 (in this example, the character display of "+10") is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example), and the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output (see steps 076IWS325, S326).

Next, during the high probability / second KT state, a small hit occurs and a game ball wins in the special winning opening, and a suggestion effect at the time of small hit winning is produced based on the winning of the game ball in the special winning opening. It is assumed that the execution of is decided. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (G), the winning display 076IW013 (in this example, the character display of "+10") is displayed according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect, and the speaker. From 8L and 8R, a winning sound corresponding to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect is output (see steps 076IWS323 and S324). For example, when the small hit winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 2666 during the high probability / second KT state and the number of prize balls reaches 2666. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (H), the character display 076IW014 such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed (see step 076IWS360).

In this example, the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed is shown. For example, when the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is decided, the image display device 5 displays "2456". A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect E, a character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-52 and 9-53, although the illustration is omitted, for example, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 1000. In that case, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "1000 OVER", and the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is decided based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 2000, a character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasizing effect B is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is decided based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 3000, a character display such as "3000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect C is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is decided based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 4000, a character display such as "4000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect D is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is decided based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 5000, a character display such as "5000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasizing effect E is executed.

In this example, the number of prize balls has reached 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 (in other words, a small hit during a big hit game or a high probability / second KT state). Although the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios according to the total of the game values given by the above, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, depending on the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are performed at different selection ratios. May be configured to perform, and various aspects are conceivable.

Next, the small hit advance suggestion effect, the small hit number suggestion effect, and the battle effect that are executed during the high probability / low base state (second KT state) will be described. 9-54 to 9-59 are descriptions for explaining the production modes of the small hit advance suggestion effect, the small hit number suggestion effect, and the battle effect executed in the high probability / low base state (second KT state). It is a figure. In FIGS. 9-54 to 9-59, the display screens change in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on.

In the high probability / low base state (second KT state), as shown in FIG. 9-54 (A), the image display device 5 displays characters such as "small hit RUSH in progress!" 076IW020. Is displayed, and it is notified that a high probability / low base state (second KT state) is in progress. Further, in this example, in the case of the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the gauge display 076IW021 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-54 (A), and the second 2 The number of small hits in hold storage may be notified. In this example, since the gauge display 076IW021 is displayed in such a manner that the scales up to the third scale are filled, it is notified that there are three second reserved memories that are small hits.

Next, when a small hit occurs during the high probability / low base state (second KT state), as shown in FIG. 9-54 (B), the scale of the gauge display 076IW021 is reduced by one to become a small hit. It is informed that the hold memory has been reduced to two (see step 076IWS9724). Next, when a small hit is further generated during the high probability / low base state (second KT state), as shown in FIG. 9-54 (C), the scale of the gauge display 076IW021 is reduced by one to become a small hit. 2 It is notified that the reserved memory has been reduced to one (see step 076IWS9724).

Then, when a small hit is further generated during the high probability / low base state (second KT state), as shown in FIG. 9-54 (D), the scale of the gauge display 076IW021 is reduced by one to become a small hit. 2 It is notified that the hold storage has become 0 (see step 076IWS9724). In this example, when the number of small hits in the second hold storage during notification becomes 0, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (E), the gauge display 076IW021 is erased. Not limited to such an aspect, in the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the gauge display 076IW021 continues to be displayed even if the number of small hits in the second hold storage during notification becomes 0. It may be configured to do so.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (E), it is assumed that the next variation display is started. In the example shown in FIG. 9-55 (E), the number of small hits in the second hold storage during notification is 0 (see step 076IWS512), and the fluctuation display started this time has a fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds or It is assumed that the execution of the small hit advance suggestion effect is decided based on the small hit fluctuation as short as 5 seconds (see N in step 076IWS514). Further, it is assumed that the small hit advance suggestion effect A is determined as the type of the small hit advance suggestion effect (see step 076IWS519).

Next, when it comes to the execution timing of the small hit advance suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (F), in the image display device 5, the display 076IW022 such that the background image is separated from the central portion and the background image changes. Is performed, and the small hit advance suggestion effect A is executed. Next, at the end timing of the small hit advance suggestion effect A, the small hit number suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 9-55 (G) (see step 076IWS8125). In the example shown in FIG. 9-55 (G), since the number of small hits in the second hold storage is 4, the case where the character display 076IW023 such as "small hit + 4 times!" Is displayed is shown. ing.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 (F) and 9-55 (G), the upper right end of the display screen of the image display device 5 is being executed during the small hit advance suggestion effect A and the small hit number suggestion effect. In, the variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (H), the gauge display 076IW021 is started to be displayed according to the number of small hits in the second hold storage (see step 076IWS8126). In the example shown in FIG. 9-55 (H), since the number of small hits in the second hold storage is 4, the display of the gauge display 076IW021 is started in a mode in which the scales up to the fourth are filled. The case is shown.

When the next variation display is started, for example, when only two second hold storages are accumulated and the number of small hits in the second hold storage is 2, FIG. 9-55 ( In H), the display of the gauge display 076IW021 is started in a mode in which the second scale is filled. Further, for example, when only three second reserved storages are accumulated and the number of small hits in the second reserved storage is 3, in FIG. 9-55 (H), the scales up to the third are scaled. The display of the gauge display 076IW021 is started in the manner of being filled up to.

In this example, for example, when the number of small hits in the second hold storage is 4, the gauge display 076IW021 is displayed in a manner of uniformly notifying the number of small hits of 4. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even if the number of small hits is 4, the gauge display 076IW021 may be displayed in a manner of notifying the number of small hits of 2 or 3.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 9-56 (E), it is assumed that the small hit advance suggestion effect B is determined as the type of the small hit advance suggestion effect (see step 076IWS519). In this case, when the execution timing of the small hit advance suggestion effect B is reached, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (F), the image display device 5 displays characters such as “PUSH!” And push buttons in a blue display color. The operation promotion display 076IW024 including the image imitating 31B is displayed, and the small hit advance suggestion effect B is executed (see step 076IWS8116).

Then, when the push button 31B is pressed (see step 076IWS8122) or after the effect period of the small hit prior suggestion effect has elapsed (see step 076IWS8123), the small hit is as shown in FIG. 9-56 (G). The number-of-times suggestion effect is executed (see step 076IWS8125). In the example shown in FIG. 9-56 (G), since the number of small hits in the second hold storage is 4, the case where the character display 076IW023 such as "small hit + 4 times!" Is displayed is shown. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (H), the gauge display 076IW021 is started to be displayed according to the number of small hits in the second hold storage (see step 076IWS8126). In the example shown in FIG. 9-56 (H), since the number of small hits in the second hold storage is 4, the display of the gauge display 076IW021 is started in a mode in which the scales up to the fourth are filled. The case is shown.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-57 (E), it is assumed that the small hit advance suggestion effect C is determined as the type of the small hit advance suggestion effect (see step 076IWS519). In this case, when the execution timing of the small hit advance suggestion effect C is reached, as shown in FIG. 9-57 (F), the image display device 5 displays characters such as “PUSH!” And push buttons in a red display color. The operation promotion display 076IW025 including the image imitating 31B is displayed, and the small hit advance suggestion effect C is executed (see step 076IWS8116).

Next, when the push button 31B is pressed (see step 076IWS8122) or after the effect period of the small hit prior suggestion effect has elapsed (see step 076IWS8123), the small hit is as shown in FIG. 9-57 (G). The number-of-times suggestion effect is executed (see step 076IWS8125). In the example shown in FIG. 9-57 (G), since the number of small hits in the second hold storage is 4, the case where the character display 076IW023 such as "small hit + 4 times!" Is displayed is shown. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-57 (H), the gauge display 076IW021 is started to be displayed according to the number of small hits in the second hold storage (see step 076IWS8126). In the example shown in FIG. 9-57 (H), since the number of small hits in the second hold storage is 4, the display of the gauge display 076IW021 is started in a mode in which the scales up to the fourth are filled. The case is shown.

Further, when the number of small hits in the second hold storage during notification is 0 and the fluctuation display having a long fluctuation time of 2 minutes is executed as the next fluctuation display, a battle is performed during the fluctuation display. The production may be executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-58 (E), when the execution timing of the battle effect comes after the next fluctuation display is started, the ally character 076IW026 appears as shown in FIG. 9-58 (F). At the same time, the enemy character 076IW027 appears, and an effect is executed in which the friendly character 076IW026 and the enemy character 076IW027 battle.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-58 (G), when the effect that the ally character 076IW026 wins the battle is executed and the effect period of the battle effect elapses (see step 076IWS8124), FIG. 9-58 (see step 076IWS8124). As shown in H), the small hit number suggestion effect is executed (see step 076IWS8125). In the example shown in FIG. 9-58 (H), since the number of small hits in the second hold storage is 4, the case where the character display 076IW023 such as "small hit + 4 times!" Is displayed is shown. ing.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-58 (F) to (H), during the execution of the battle effect and the small hit count suggestion effect, the decorative pattern is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the image display device 5. The variable display is reduced.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-59 (I), the gauge display 076IW021 is started to be displayed according to the number of small hits in the second hold storage (see step 076IWS8126). In the example shown in FIG. 9-59 (I), since the number of small hits in the second hold storage is 4, the display of the gauge display 076IW021 is started in a mode in which the scales up to the fourth are filled. The case is shown.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-58 and 9-59, the case where the battle effect is executed in the small hit variation is shown, but for example, in the case of executing the battle effect in the large hit variation which is the probability variation big hit, FIG. After the production that the ally character 076IW026 wins the battle is executed in 9-58 (G), the jackpot symbol of the probability variation symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, and the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is started. It will be. Further, for example, when the battle effect is executed in the jackpot fluctuation which is a normal jackpot, instead of the effect shown in FIG. 9-58 (G), after the effect that the ally character 076IW026 is defeated in the battle is executed. , The jackpot symbol of the non-probability variation symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, and the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot is started.

In this example, the case where the battle effect is executed during the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even in the high probability / high base state (first KT state), the battle effect may be configured to be executable.

Further, in this example, the case where the small hit advance suggestion effect and the small hit number suggestion effect are executed in the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even in the high probability / high base state (first KT state) or the low probability / high base state (first KT state), the small hit advance suggestion effect and the small hit number suggestion effect may be configured to be executable. ..

Further, the mode of the battle effect is not limited to the mode shown in FIGS. 9-58 (F) and 9-58 (G). For example, the battle effect is configured so that there are multiple types of enemy characters, and the ratio of the number of small hits when executing the small hit number suggestion effect after the battle effect wins differs depending on the type of enemy character that appears. It may be configured. Further, for example, the ratio of the number of small hits when the small hit number suggestion effect is executed after the victory of the battle effect may be different depending on the effect development of the battle effect (for example, the presence or absence of the chance-up effect).

Next, the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol while the variation display of one special symbol is being executed will be described. FIG. 9-60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a probability variation jackpot (10R probability variation in this example). In the case of a jackpot fluctuation that results in a jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot), as shown in FIG. 9-60 (A), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 076IWS1120A, step 076IWS1120A, See step 076IWS1128A Y).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 9-60 (B). When this is done, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 076IWS1128A and step 076IWS1129A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-60 (C). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 076IWS1120A, step 076IWS1120A, See step 076IWS1127A N).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, the variation display of the second special symbol is a probability variation jackpot (10R probability variation in this example). In the case of a jackpot fluctuation that is a jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot), as shown in FIG. 9-60 (D), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is displayed. Is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 076IWS1120B, step 076IWS1120B, See step 076IWS1128B Y).

On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 9-60 (E). When this is done, the variation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 076IWS1128B and step 076IWS1129B).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-60 (F), the small hit is displayed. Even if the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 076IWS1120B, step 076IWS1120B, See step 076IWS1127B N).

The control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed will be described.

(Modification example 1)
FIG. 9-61 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first modification. In FIG. 9-61, the processing of steps 076IWS1120A to S1127A is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 9-13, but in the modified example 1, the determination processing of step 076IWS1128A shown in FIG. 9-13 does not exist. ..

In the first modification, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the process of step S1129A as it is, and transmits the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 076IWS1129A). In FIG. 9-61, the process of step 076IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-13.

FIG. 9-62 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the first modification. In FIG. 9-62, the processing of steps 076IWS1120B to S1127B is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 9-16, but in the modified example 1, the determination processing of step 076IWS1128B shown in FIG. 9-16 does not exist. ..

In the first modification, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the process of step S1129B as it is, and transmits the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 076IWS1129B). In FIG. 9-62, the process of step 076IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-16.

FIG. 9-63 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the first modification.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 9-63 (A), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly missed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot. The stop display is displayed (see N in step 076IWS1127A and step 076IWS1129A).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-63 (B), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 076IWS1120A, step 076IWS1120A, See step 076IWS1127A N).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 9-63 (C), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly missed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot. The stop display is displayed (see N in step 076IWS1127B and step 076IWS1129B).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-63 (D), the small hit is displayed. Even if the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 076IWS1120B, step 076IWS1120B, See step 076IWS1127B N).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 9-64 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the second modification. In FIG. 9-64, the processing of steps 076IWS1120A to S1126A is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 9-13, but in the modified example 2, the determination processing of steps 076IWS1127A and S1128A shown in FIG. 9-13 is used. Alternatively, the process of step 076IWS1127C is included.

In the second modification, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS1129A). In FIG. 9-64, the process of step 076IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-13.

FIG. 9-65 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the second modification. In FIG. 9-65, the processing of steps 076IWS1120B to S1126B is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 9-16, but in the modified example 2, the determination processing of steps 076IWS1127B and S1128B shown in FIG. 9-16 is used. Instead, it includes the processing of step 076IWS1127D.

In the second modification, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS1129B). In FIG. 9-65, the process of step 076IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-16.

FIG. 9-66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modified example 2.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 9-66 (A), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is usually a jackpot. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 076IWS1120A, step 076IWS1120A, See step 076IWS1127C Y).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-66 (B), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 076IWS1127C and step 076IWS1129A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 9-66 (C), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is usually a jackpot. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 076IWS1120B, step 076IWS1120B, See step 076IWS1127D Y).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-66 (D), the small hit is displayed. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 076IWS1127D and step 076IWS1129B).

Further, as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol, other than those shown in the modification 1 and the modification 2, for example, the deviation is lost. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the forced loss is stopped, while the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is a small hit is performed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol which is the 10R probability variation jackpot, the small hit symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, while the 2R probability variation jackpot is obtained. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the normal state (low probability / low base state), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed is off and fluctuates. Either the small hit fluctuation or the big hit fluctuation may be configured to stop forcibly. With such a configuration, in this example, if the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed in the low probability / high base state, the transition to the low probability / low base state is performed (see FIG. 9-22), but 50 times. When the fluctuation display is finished and the transition to the low probability / low base state is performed, 1 to 4 second hold memories are accumulated, and if there is a second hold memory that becomes a big hit, the forced loss stop is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a big hit at an unintended timing. In particular, in a game machine configured to be controllable to the KT state as in this example, by performing a right-handed operation in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the second start winning opening is easy to win. It is also possible to make a start prize and display the variation of the second special symbol, and at the same time, let the first start prize opening win the start and display the variation of the first special symbol. It is effective as a preventive measure for the method.

As described above, various modes can be considered as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed.

(Modification 3)
In addition, the feature unit 076IW controls to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol by the same control in the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol. Although the case (see FIG. 9-60) is shown, different controls may be used. FIG. 9-67 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the modified example 3. In the modified example 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIGS. 9-13. In FIG. 9-67, the processing of steps 076IWS1120B to S1125B is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 9-16, but in the modified example 3, the determination processing of steps 076IWS1126B to S1128B shown in FIG. 9-16 is performed. not exist. Therefore, in the third modification, unless the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (N in step 076IWS1125B), the CPU 103 ends the process as it is.

FIG. 9-68 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modified example 3.

As shown in FIGS. 9-68 (A) and 9-68 (C), in the modified example 3, a small hit is displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation big hit. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, as in FIGS. 9-60 (A) and 9-60 (C). Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-68 (D) and 9-68 (F), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is a small hit or a probabilistic large hit. In that case, similarly to FIGS. 9-60 (D) and (F), the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-68 (B), in the modified example 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit. In the same manner as in FIG. 9-60 (B), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as an off symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-68 (E), in the modified example 3, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. In, unlike FIG. 9-60 (E), the variation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-68, in the modified example 3, the variation display of the special symbol is forcibly removed and forced by the symbol when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. The control to display the stop is different.

In the third modification, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot, the small hit symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, while the normal jackpot is normally hit. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display is continued, but it is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, conversely, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot, the fluctuation display is continued, while the normal jackpot is displayed. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, it may be configured to forcibly stop. Also, for example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot), the forced loss is lost. On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot), it fluctuates. It may be configured to continue the display. In this way, the control for forced loss stop may be different depending on whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in some form.

(Modification example 4)
FIG. 9-69 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the modified example 4. In FIGS. 9-69, the processes of steps 076IWS1120A to S1128A are similar to those processes shown in FIGS. 9-13.

In the fourth modification, when the variation display of the first special symbol that does not become either a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 6R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 076IWS1128A, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step 076IWS1131A). If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the process ends as it is. If the probability change flag is set (that is, in the probability change state), the CPU 103 controls to send the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS1129A). The process of step 076IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-13.

In the fourth modification, when the determination process of step 076IWS1131A is executed, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit. The variation display of the first special symbol is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, but the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, unless it is in the probability variation state.

FIG. 9-70 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the modified example 4. In FIGS. 9-70, the processes of steps 076IWS1120B to S1128B are similar to those processes shown in FIGS. 9-16.

In the fourth modification, when the variable display of the first special symbol that does not become a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 076IWS1128B, the CPU 103 Checks whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 076IWS1131B). If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the process ends as it is. If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 076IWS1129B). The process of step 076IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-16.

In the fourth modification, when the determination process of step 076IWS1131B is executed, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. The variation display of the second special symbol is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, but the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variable display of the second special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, unless it is in the probability variation state.

In the modified example 4, a case is shown in which control is performed to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol depending on whether or not the probability change flag is set (whether or not it is in the probability change state), but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, it may be configured to control to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol depending on whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. Further, for example, the control may be configured to forcibly stop and display the off symbol only when the high probability / low base state (high probability flag is on and high base flag is off). In this way, any form may be used as long as it is configured to forcibly control the stop display with a detached symbol according to the current gaming state.

In addition, when the control is configured to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol only in the high probability / low base state as described above, it is possible to prevent a normal big hit in the variable display of one of the identification information. It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

Further, in this example, the case where the small hit number suggestion effect is executably configured as the effect result of the battle effect is shown (see FIGS. 9-58 and 9-59), but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect of the common mode is executed in the second KT state and the other gaming states, and in other than the second KT state, the result suggesting the possibility of a big hit as the effect result of the effect of the common mode is displayed, and the second In the 2KT state, the small hit number suggestion effect may be executed as the effect result of the effect of the common mode. Hereinafter, a modified example 5 in which the roulette effect of the common mode is executed in the second KT state and the other gaming states will be described.

FIG. 9-71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the roulette effect in the modified example 5. In the modified example 5, as shown in FIG. 9-71 (A), the roulette effect display area provided on the display screen of the image display device 5 regardless of whether it is in the second KT state or the other gaming state. In 076IW030, the roulette effect is started in a manner in which the roulette scrolls and displays according to a common effect mode. Next, in the case of a gaming state other than the second KT state (for example, low probability / low base state (normal state)), the display timing of the effect result is, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-71 (B1). , In the roulette effect display area 076IW030, the character display 076IW031 such as "super heat" is displayed as the effect result, and the effect result suggesting the possibility of a big hit is displayed. On the other hand, in the second KT state, when the display timing of the effect result is reached, for example, in the roulette effect display area 076IW030, the character display 076IW032 such as "small 4" is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-71 (B2). The effect result that is displayed as the effect result and suggests (notifies) that there are four second hold memories that are small hits is displayed.

Further, the mode of the roulette effect is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, when the roulette effect is executed in a gaming state other than the second KT state, a “chance” is produced as an effect suggesting the possibility of a big hit. Or "opportunity" or the like may be displayed, or a display suggesting that the display mode of the hold display may change may be performed to change the display mode of the hold display.

Further, not only in the mode shown in FIGS. 9-71, for example, when the roulette effect is executed not only in the second KT state but also in the KT state including the first KT state and the second KT state, the effect result of the roulette effect is small. When the hit number suggestion effect is executed and the roulette effect is executed in other normal states, the result suggesting the possibility of a big hit may be displayed, and various aspects are conceivable.

Further, in this example, the case where the number of second reserved storages that are small hits is notified by displaying the gauge is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. Hereinafter, a modification 6 for notifying the number of small hits will be described. FIG. 9-72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of notifying the number of small hits in the modified example 6.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-72 (A), three small hit icons 076IW041 are displayed on the left side of the image display device 5 based on the fact that the number of second reserved storages that are small hits is three. The case is shown. Then, after that, every time a small hit occurs, the displayed small hit icon 076IW041 is deleted one by one. In this way, instead of the gauge display, the number of small hit icons 076IW041 displayed may be used to notify the number of second reserved storages that are small hits.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-72 (B), based on the fact that the number of second reserved storages that are small hits is 3, in the left side of the image display device 5, the predetermined count number display area 076IW042 is "3". Is displayed. After that, every time a small hit occurs, the number of counts displayed in the count number display area 076IW042 is updated to "2", "1", and "0" in order. In this way, instead of the gauge display, the countdown display displayed in the count number display area 076IW042 may be configured to notify the number of second reserved storages that are small hits.

When the small hit icon suggesting a small hit is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-72 (A), the small hit icon may be further changed to the big hit icon suggesting a big hit. You may. In this case, for example, when the icon changes to a jackpot icon, the jackpot icon corresponding to the number of rounds during the jackpot game may be displayed to suggest (notify) the number of jackpot rounds.

As described above, according to the feature unit 076IW, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state), and a non-special state (for example, a low hit game state). It is possible to control a special state (for example, a high probability / low base state (second KT state)) that is more frequently controlled to a special state than a probability / low base state (normal state). Further, in the special state, the pre-suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 9-55 (F), 9-56 (F), and FIG. 9) suggesting in advance that there is a hold memory corresponding to being controlled by the special state. The small hit advance suggestion effect shown in −57 (F) can be executed, and the number of times suggestion effect suggesting the number of times controlled to a special state based on the execution of the advance suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 9-). 55 (G), the small hit number suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 9-56 (G) and 9-57 (G)) can be executed. In addition, the advance suggestion effect (for example, the small hit advance suggestion effect A to C) can be executed by a plurality of types of execution modes. In addition, as an execution pattern of the number-of-times suggestion effect, at least the first pattern (for example, "small hit + 2 times!" Or "small" suggesting that the special state is controlled the first time (for example, 2 times or 3 times)). A character display such as "Hit +3 times!" Is displayed) and a second pattern (for example, "Small hit +4 times") suggesting that the special state is controlled by a second number (for example, 4 times) that is larger than the first number. It is possible to execute the number-of-times suggestion effect by displaying characters such as "!"). Further, the ratio of which execution pattern is used to execute the number-of-times suggestion effect differs depending on the execution mode of the advance suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-43, the small hit advance suggestion effect A is executed. For example, the ratio of 2 small hits is high, the ratio of 3 small hits is high if the small hit advance suggestion effect B is executed, and the ratio of 4 small hits is high if the small hit advance suggestion effect C is executed. Is high). Therefore, since the effect pattern in the special state can be diversified, it is possible to improve the effect regarding the period controlled by the special state and improve the interest in the game.

In this example, the case where the small hit advance suggestion effect is executed at the timing when the number of small hits being notified becomes 0 is not limited to such a mode. For example, the small hit advance suggestion effect is executed before the number of small hits being notified becomes 0 (for example, the operation fan display that prompts the operation of the operation means is performed), and the small hit number suggestion effect and the gauge display look-ahead effect are produced. It may be configured to execute a small hit advance suggestion effect.

Further, according to the feature unit 076IW, it is possible to display a specific display (for example, gauge display 076IW021) corresponding to the number of times controlled by the special state suggested in the number-of-times suggestion effect. Therefore, since the effect pattern in the special state can be diversified, it is possible to improve the effect regarding the period controlled by the special state and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present feature unit 076IW, it is possible to display a specific display (for example, gauge display 076IW021) corresponding to the number of times controlled by the special state suggested in the number-of-times suggestion effect, and when controlled to the special state, The specific display is changed in response to being controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-54, the scale of the gauge display 076IW021 is decremented by one for each small hit). Further, when the number of times controlled by the special state suggested by the specific display is small, the number of times suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the number of times controlled by the special state suggested by the specific display is large (for example). , When the number of small hits notified by the gauge display 076IW021 becomes 0, the small hit number suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the smaller the number of small hits suggested (notified) by the small hit number suggestion effect, the smaller the small hit. The frequency of suggestion effects is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the notification according to the situation. For example, by setting the execution rate of the small hit number suggestion effect to be higher when the number of small hits is small, the player can be effectively encouraged and the interest in the game can be improved.

In this example, the case where the small hit number suggestion effect is executed when the number of small hits being notified becomes 0 is not limited to such a mode. For example, even when the number of small hits being notified is one, two, or three, the number of small hits suggestion effect may be executed and the number of small hits being notified may be added and displayed. In this case, when the number of small hits being notified is as small as one, the frequency of executing the small hit number suggestion effect is higher than when the number of small hits being notified is as large as two or three. It may be configured so that the number of small hits can be easily added.

Further, according to the feature unit 076IW, a specific effect (for example, the battle effect shown in FIGS. 9-58 (F) and (G)) can be executed as a prior suggestion effect. In addition, as a result of the effect of the specific effect, it is possible to execute the effect of suggesting whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state or the number of times (for example, when the battle effect (win) is executed due to the fluctuation of the big hit, it becomes a probabilistic big hit. Is notified, and when a battle effect (win) is executed due to a small hit fluctuation, a small hit number suggestion effect is executed). Therefore, since the effect pattern in the special state can be diversified, it is possible to improve the effect regarding the period controlled by the special state and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature part 076IW, the case where either the notification of whether or not the probability variation big hit is achieved or the small hit number suggestion effect is executed in the battle effect is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect and 1 In the battle effect, both the notification of whether or not the probability variation big hit will occur and the effect of suggesting the number of small hits may be made feasible. With such a configuration, a specific effect (for example, the battle effect shown in FIGS. 9-58 (F) and (G)) can be executed as a prior suggestion effect. Further, as a result of the effect of the specific effect, it is possible to execute the effect of suggesting whether or not the effect is controlled to an advantageous state and the number of times. Therefore, since the effect pattern in the special state can be diversified, it is possible to improve the effect regarding the period controlled by the special state and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present feature unit 076IW, it is possible to execute an advantageous state suggestion effect (for example, a button notice effect) that suggests the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state in a non-special state. In addition, an execution mode including at least the first element (for example, operation promotion display of a blue display color) and a second element (for example, a red display color) that is more likely to be controlled in a more advantageous state than the first element. It is possible to execute an advantageous state suggestion effect (for example, button notice effects A and B) depending on the execution mode including the operation promotion display). Further, the pre-suggestion effect (for example, the small hit pre-suggestion effect B, C) can be executed by the execution mode including at least the first element and the execution mode including the second element. Further, when the pre-suggestion effect is executed by the execution mode including the second element, the pre-suggestion effect is controlled to a special state at a higher rate in the number-of-times suggestion effect than when the pre-suggestion effect is executed by the execution mode including the first element. It is suggested that a large number of times are performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-43, if the small hit advance suggestion effect B is executed, the ratio of the number of small hits is 3 and the small hit advance suggestion effect C is high. If executed, the ratio of 4 small hits is high). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being betrayed and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the feature unit 076IW, it is possible to execute a special effect (for example, the roulette effect shown in FIGS. 9-71) including an effect mode common to the non-special state and the special state. Further, in the non-special state, it is possible to execute a special effect including an effect result suggesting the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, character display 076IW031 such as "super heat" shown in FIG. 9-71 (B1)). Yes, in a special state, a special effect can be executed as a prior suggestion effect, and a special effect including the number of times suggestion effect as an effect result (for example, character display 076IW032 such as "small 4" shown in FIG. 9-71 (B2)). Is feasible. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by standardizing the materials for the production.

In this example, the case where the special effect is a roulette effect is shown, but the effect is not limited to such an aspect, and for example, if the effect includes an effect mode common to the normal state and the second KT state, the roulette effect is used. It may be configured to execute an effect other than.

Further, according to the present feature unit 076IW, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. In addition, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is a state different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control a special state (for example, a KT state) in which value is easily given. Then, the setting suggestion effect (for example, the small hit winning suggestion effect) can be executed in response to the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) through the specific area (for example, the special winning opening). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

Specifically, in this example, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit winning based on the fact that the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH). However, since the frequency of winning the special winning opening is particularly high during the small hit RUSH, it is possible to pay attention to the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit prize), and improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect. be able to.

In this example, a setting suggestion effect (in this example, a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize) is executed based on a game ball winning a special winning opening as a specific area. I can't be limited. For example, even if the setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the starting winning opening (winning ball device 6A, variable winning ball device 6B), the general winning opening 10, and the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening as a specific area. Good. Further, as a specific area, the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable based on the entry of the game ball into the out port. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gates such as the passing gate 41 as a specific area.

Further, according to the present feature unit 076IW, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. In addition, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is a state different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control a special state (for example, a KT state) in which value is easily given. Further, the setting suggestion effect (for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect) can be executed, and the ease of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the length of the period controlled to the special state (for example, FIGS. 9-33). As shown in the above, when the number of prize balls reaches 456, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A can be executed with a 3% probability, and when the number of prize balls reaches 555, the prize balls have a 2% probability. The number display suggestion effect B can be executed, and when the number of prize balls reaches 666, the prize ball number display suggestion effect C can be executed with a 1% probability, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2456, 5 The prize ball number display suggestion effect D can be executed with a% probability, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2555, the prize ball number display suggestion effect E can be executed with a 3% probability, and the number of prize balls is 2666. When the number is reached, there is a 2% chance that the prize ball number display suggestion effect F can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

In this example, the timing at which the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 as "the length of the period controlled by the special state" (in other words, The case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect is executed during the period until a certain game value is given) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the "length of the period controlled to the special state" is controlled to the length of the period controlled to the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) or the special state (in this example, the small hit game state). It may be the length of the period to be used, or it may be the total length of these periods.

When the length of the period controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is used as the "length of the period controlled to the special state", the length of the period from the fanfare to the ending of the jackpot game is used. Alternatively, the length of the period of only the round game during the big hit game may be used. In this case, for example, the longer the period from the fanfare to the ending of the big hit game, the higher the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed. Further, for example, in the case of a big hit with a small number of rounds during the big hit game, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than the big hit with a large number of rounds.

Further, for example, as "the length of the period controlled by the special state", the number of small hits generated during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state are used. Depending on the situation, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed. In this case, for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of small hits increases, or the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of executions of the variable display increases. .. Further, for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate at the timing when the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends, and various as "the length of the period controlled by the special state". Is conceivable.

Generally, in a game machine, when the number of prize balls reaches a certain number and a display such as "XXXXXX OVER" is displayed, "1000 OVER" of the prize ball number emphasis effect shown in this example or It is displayed in units that are limited to some extent, such as displaying in units of 1000 prize balls, such as displaying "2000 OVER". On the other hand, the prize ball number display suggestion effect shown in this example is a timing different from the usual timing when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666. Since it is executed in, it is possible to expect a high setting while giving a sense of discomfort to the occurrence timing of the prize ball number display suggestion effect, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present feature unit 076IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state). Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, the number of special determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Further, according to this feature unit 076IW, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect in response to control to a special state (for example, a small hit occurs during a high probability / second KT state, and a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening. Based on what you have done, it is possible to perform a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize and a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control to the special state.

In this example, the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect) is executed based on the game ball winning in the special winning opening. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at the start of the small hit game during the small hit fluctuation or when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to the open state. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the small hit notification mode when a small hit occurs. In this way, any form may be used as long as the setting suggestion effect is executed in response to the control of the small hit.

Further, according to the feature unit 076IW, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17) are played when the game is controlled to the advantageous state and the special state. The medium (for example, a game ball) can be controlled into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter or impossible-entry non-easy state (for example, a closed state). Further, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in response to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are opened, which is large. Based on the fact that a game ball has been won in the winning opening or the special winning opening, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

In this example, when the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the small hit prize suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect) is executed based on the game ball winning in the large prize opening or the special prize opening. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in the open state and the opening effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the effect mode of the opening effect. It may be configured as follows. It suffices as long as the setting suggestion effect is executed in response to the fact that the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state in some form.

Further, according to the feature unit 076IW, when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of the big hit game, when shifting from the low probability / first KT state to the normal state (low probability / low base state). ), The setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display is changed in step 076IWS624). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the switching of the control of the gaming state.

In this example, "when the control of the game state is switched" is set at the start or end of the jackpot game, or when shifting from the low probability / first KT state to the normal state (low probability / low base state). Although the case where the suggestion effect is configured to be feasible is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the production period when shifting to the big hit game during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), or shifting from the big hit game to the high base state (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state). The setting suggestion effect may be configured to be feasible during the effect period. Further, for example, a gaming machine configured to shift to a high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) based on executing a predetermined number of fluctuation displays during a high base state or a predetermined number of small hits. In the effect period when shifting from the high base state to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable, and various as "when the control of the game state is switched". Is conceivable.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the display mode of the right-handed display or the left-handed display is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the effect of the fanfare effect at the start of the big hit and the effect of the ending effect at the end of the big hit, and various modes can be considered.

Further, according to the feature unit 076IW, according to the number of times of control to the special state in the special state, the total of the game values given by the special state in the special state, or the number of times of executing the variable display in the special state. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect with different selection ratios (for example, prizes with different selection ratios depending on the number of prize balls reaching 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666. The ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed, or, for example, according to the number of small hits generated during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state. , The prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F may be executed at different selection ratios.) Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the number of times of control to the special state, the total number of game values, or the number of times of execution of the variable display.

Further, according to the present feature unit 076IW, as special states, an advantageous special state (for example, a second KT state) and a disadvantageous special state (for example, a first KT state) that is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the advantageous special state. Can be controlled. Further, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect by different selection ratios when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area during the disadvantageous special state (for example). Only when a small hit is made and a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the second KT state, the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the type of special state.

In this example, the case where the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed only when the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the second KT state is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, even if a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the first KT state, a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect for displaying the number of prize balls can be executed, and the game ball is placed in the special winning opening during the second KT state. Depending on whether the player wins a prize or a game ball wins in the special prize opening during the 1st KT state, it is possible to execute a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect at different rates. It may be configured. Further, for example, even when an irregular game ball is won in the special winning opening during the non-KT state, a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed. ..

In the case of the above configuration, if a prize is awarded to the special winning opening in the 1st KT state (high base state) or an irregular winning occurs, or if a winning is generated to the special winning opening during the 2nd KT state. In comparison with, a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate, or a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect may be performed. It may be configured to run.

In this feature unit 076IW, the value of the prize ball counter and the number of prize balls are displayed during the big hit game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, and the 6R normal jackpot and during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH). Is updated, and the value of the prize ball counter is not updated during the jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation hit and the 2R normal jackpot and during the high base state (high probability / 1st KT state, low probability / 1st KT state). (The prize ball counter is not reset), and in principle, the prize ball number display is hidden, and in the low probability / 1st KT state, 50 fluctuation displays are completed and the normal state (low probability / low base state) is restored. The case where the value of the prize ball counter is controlled to be reset at the time of transition is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. The value of the prize ball counter may be updated even during the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit.

In this example, by configuring as described above, for example, the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) is terminated and the high base state (high probability / first KT state, low probability / first KT) is completed. If a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs during the high base state and then shifts to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) again, the prize during the previous small hit RUSH. The value of the prize ball counter can be updated and the prize ball number display can be displayed while the number of balls is inherited.

In addition, not limited to the mode of displaying the number of prize balls as shown in this example, for example, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs and the player shifts to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), the high probability / second KT state (Small hit RUSH) may be set as one section and the big hit game immediately before the section may be set as one section, and the total number of prize balls in the section may be totaled and the total value may be displayed. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect suggesting the current set value may be executed by changing the display mode (display color in this example) of the aggregated value.

Further, in the feature unit 076IW, as a "setting suggestion effect", a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect is performed in a manner in which the current set value suggests one of the set values "1" to "6". Has been shown, but is not limited to such a mode. For example, instead of suggesting the current set value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in a manner of suggesting whether or not the setting change has been made to change the set value when the power is turned on to the game machine. Good. As such, the "setting suggestion effect" may be any form of suggestion regarding the setting.

Further, according to the feature unit 076IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. , When a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the variable display display result is special. When the display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Further, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probabilistic jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the first specific display result is derived and displayed. It is more advantageous for the player than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game is completed). Further, while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. The display result of the variable display of one of the identification information is not derived and displayed (for example, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol or the first 2 The variable display of the special symbol is continuously executed). Further, during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derivation display, the variable display of the identification information of one of them is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is an outlier symbol). Forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

Specifically, when the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of one of the identification information results in a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) even though the transition to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or probability variation state has occurred. The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probabilistic change state will end immediately, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will decline. On the other hand, if the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of the identification information on one side is forcibly forcibly removed and the symbol is stopped and displayed (forced off), even the variable display that is a probable change jackpot will be forcibly removed. As a result, the game value given to the player in the advantageous state (big hit game state) is reduced, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this feature unit 076IW, while the fluctuation display that is a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is forcibly removed, the fluctuation display that is a probability variation jackpot is extended (interruption of measurement of fluctuation time). , While suppressing the decrease in the game value given to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this example, as an aspect of "not stopping the variable display of one of the identification information", the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. Has been shown, but is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is interrupted (paused), and the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that was interrupted after the end of the small hit game is resumed. You may. Anything that does not completely stop the variable display in some form is sufficient.

Further, according to the feature unit 076IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to the special state is easily given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given by the special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 076IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The state)) can be controlled. Further, the first specific display result is controlled to a specific state based on the derivation display (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the end of the big hit game based on the probability change big hit), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on this, it is controlled to a non-specific state (for example, it is not controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of a big hit game based on a normal big hit). Therefore, it is possible to realize control considering whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 076IW, the special display result can be derived and displayed regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (). 9-1 and 9-2). Further, the first identification is based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the first identification information. The variable display of information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 9-68 (B)). Further, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the second identification information is displayed. Control is not performed to derive and display the variable display of the above with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 9-68 (E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

Further, according to the present feature unit 076IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The state)) can be controlled. Further, the variable display executing means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, and is a variable display corresponding to the second specific display result when controlled to the specific state. Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (FIGS. 9-69, 9-). See 70). Further, when controlled to the non-specific state, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the other identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIGS. 9-69 and 9-70). ). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 076IW, the first reserved storage means (for example, the first reserved storage buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the reserved storage and the variable display of the second identification information. The information is provided as a second hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) that can be stored as hold storage. Further, when the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the display result of the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is set. It is controllable, and when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, a special state (for example, a small hit symbol) is displayed. It is possible to control the small hit game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency at which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes the special display result is increased. Further, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel. As the display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the reserved memory can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the feature unit 076IW, a predetermined value can be given when the special state is controlled (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening). It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of a game ball to the large winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 9-51 (1) and (2) are lit) and the first specific notification are more visible than the first specific notification. It is possible to execute the second specific notification (for example, the display of the right-handed display 076IW007 shown in FIG. 9-51 (1)) with high possibility. When controlled to an advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 9-51 (1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the special state is controlled. At that time, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 9-51 (2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the feature unit 076IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, variable display of a decorative pattern) at least corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect of a common mode when it is controlled to a special state and when it is not controlled to a special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained. , Forcibly stop and display the non-reach off symbol). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognition of being controlled to a special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, the reserved memory stored by the second reserved storage means can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the feature unit 076IW, a delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium (for example, a regulation piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) is provided on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific route. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second identification information from being targeted at the timing when the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed at the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the capture measures against the game machine.

The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a passage member for moving the game ball so as to meander left and right is provided as a delay means on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area. You may.

Further, according to the feature unit 076IW, the effect is produced based on the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and the information from the game control means. It includes an effect control means for controlling (for example, an effect control CPU 120). Further, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed display 26) that performs a predetermined notification. Further, the effect control means executes a specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, right-handed notification is executed during the jackpot game regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Cases are shown, but not limited to such aspects. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left large winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right large winning opening) is also provided on the right side of the game area. If a big hit is made by the variable display of the symbol, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and if a big hit is made by the variable display of the second special symbol, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When applied to a game machine configured as described above, if a big hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, a right-handed notification is executed during the big hit game, while the variable display of the first special symbol is used. If a big hit occurs, the right-handed notification may not be executed during the big hit game. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if a jackpot is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left-handed notification may be executed during the jackpot game. That is, the specific notification executing means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right-handed winning opening) is controlled to an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a big hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, a left-handed notification is executed during the big-hit game to prevent the player from accidentally performing a right-handed operation. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

Further, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, a case where right-handed notification is executed even in the KT state is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, when the second start winning opening is applied to a game machine provided on the left side of the game area, the right-handed notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. May be good.

Further, in this example, in addition to lighting the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 only during the big hit game, right-handed notification is executed by displaying the right-handed display 076IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), when executing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, in addition to lighting the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37, The right-handed display 076IW007 may be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to execute the right-handed notification. Alternatively, in this case, for example, during the ending period at the end of the jackpot game, the right-handed display 076IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to the lighting of the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37. May be configured to execute right-handed notification.

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large size right-handed display 076IW007 as shown in FIG. 9-51 (1), the image display device 5 displays a symbol display (for example, a right-pointing triangular display) indicating right-handedness. May be configured to enable right-handed notification.

Further, the method of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices are provided, and the special variable winning ball device (special winning opening) to be opened is configured to be different depending on the small hit type, and the variable display of the first special symbol indicates a small hit. The selection ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the case is a small hit or a small hit is obtained by the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type in the open mode with a low winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a small number of prize balls. , When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the small hit type (or the small hit type in the open mode with a high winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a large number of prize balls can be easily selected. It may be configured as.

Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol, a right-handed notification is given during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-51 (2)), and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit occurs, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-51 (3)), but when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. May be configured so that right-handed notification may not be performed. For example, if a small hit occurs when the second special symbol variation display is executed in a situation where a left-handed operation should be performed in a normal state, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

Further, according to the present feature unit 076IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. Is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) that is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the non-specific state. In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled in the non-specific state and when controlled in the specific state (FIGS. 9-1 and 9). See -2). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability and the type distribution change depending on the set value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball ejection performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the set value, and the gambling may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in this feature unit 076IW, by making the number of special judgment values common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is common), it is possible to prevent the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the set value. However, it prevents the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the feature unit 076IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). Can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is increased. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability in a game machine that can be controlled to a special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 076IW, as special states, there are a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. It is controllable. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability in the game machine that can be controlled to the second special state.

Further, according to the feature unit 076IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestion effect (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 9-50) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. Therefore, by suggesting the advantage of the special state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present feature unit 076IW, a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol) different from the specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) and the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived as the variable display display result. When the variable display to be displayed is executed, the set value suggestion effect suggesting the set value (for example, the set value suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 9-49) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

In this example, the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect are executed in the variable display that is out of the way is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or the set value suggestion effect during the big hit game or the small hit game, and various aspects can be considered.

Further, according to this feature unit 076IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot). In addition, the type of advantageous state is determined by using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of advantageous state. Further, the number of advantageous type determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-3). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in the feature unit 076IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the jackpot type is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessively large depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming excessively high in gambling.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the case where the jackpot type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the jackpot type determination ratio may be different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be different depending on the set value.

Further, according to the present feature unit 076IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. Is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. It is decided that the special judgment value (for example, the judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display the variable display and the predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. A predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for determination of loss) is included. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, the number of special determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs depending on the set values (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the set value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present feature unit 076IW, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) which is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination value corresponding to the specific state of all the set values (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value in the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 076IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). It can be executed in parallel with the variable display). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the second identification information in the specific state can be displayed in a variable manner. The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 076IW, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency of the special display result is increased. Further, when a variable display that is controlled to a special state and a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) is derived and displayed is executed, a set value suggestion effect that suggests a set value (for example, the setting shown in FIGS. 9-49) is executed. Value suggestion effect) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

Further, according to the feature unit 076IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, among the judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information, the number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-2), and the judgment corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. The number of special judgment values differs between the value and the judgment value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing appropriate game playability.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… LED control board 15… Relay board 17… Special variable winning ball device 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Start Mouth switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passing gate 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold storage,
A special state control means capable of controlling a special state different from the advantageous state,
A special state control means capable of controlling a special state, which is more frequently controlled by the special state than a non-special state,
In the special state, a pre-suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a pre-suggestion effect that suggests in advance that there is a hold memory corresponding to being controlled by the special state
Based on the execution of the advance suggestion effect, the number suggestion effect execution means for suggesting the number of times controlled by the special state is provided.
The advance suggestion effect execution means can execute the advance suggestion effect by a plurality of types of execution modes.
The number-of-times suggestion effect execution means has, as the execution pattern of the number-of-times suggestion effect, at least a first pattern suggesting that the special state is controlled for the first number of times, and a first pattern in which the special state is more than the first time. The above-mentioned number-of-times suggestion effect can be executed with the second pattern suggesting that the number of times is controlled twice.
A gaming machine characterized in that the ratio of which execution pattern is used to execute the number-of-times suggestion effect differs depending on the execution mode of the advance suggestion effect.

Images